|
Translation
|
|
1. Aŋ ulòl na uŋgòʾ at
aŋ marúnoŋ na pagòŋ.
|
1. The foolish monkey and the clever turtle.
|
|
Mínsan
aŋ pagòŋ hábaŋ nalìlígo sa
ílog, ay nakàkíta syà naŋ isa ŋ
púno-ŋ-ságiŋ na lumùlútaŋ at
tinátaŋày naŋ ágos. Hiníla niya sa pasígan, dátapwat
hindí nya madalà sa lúpaʾ. Dáhil
díto 5tináwag nya aŋ kaybígan niya
ŋ uŋgòʾ at iniyálay nyà aŋ
kapútol naŋ
púno-ŋ-ságiŋ kuŋ itátanim
nyà aŋ kanyà ŋ kapartè.
Tumaŋòʾ aŋ
uŋgòʾ at hináte nilà sa
gitnàʾ mulá sa magkábila ŋ dúlo
aŋ púno naŋ
ságiŋ. Inaŋkìn naŋ uŋgò
aŋ kapútol na máy maŋa dáhon, dáhil sa panukálà nya na
iyòn ay tùtúbo na mabúti káy sa
10kapútol na wala ŋ dáhon.
|
Once upon a time, when the turtle was swimming in
the river, he saw a banana-tree adrift and being carried along by the
current. He dragged it to the beach, but was not able to carry it up to
the solid ground. Therefore he called his friend, the monkey, and
offered him a half of the banana-tree, if he would plant his part for
him. The monkey agreed, and they divided the banana-tree at the middle,
half-way from either end. The monkey took the half which had leaves,
because he thought it would grow better than the half which had
none.
|
|
Naŋ
makaraàn aŋ ila ŋ áraw, aŋ púno
naŋ uŋgòʾ ay namatày, yámaŋ aŋ sa pagòŋ ay
tumúbo haŋgàŋ sa magbúŋa. Aŋ
maŋa ságiŋ ay
nahinòg, dátapwat hindí maakyàt naŋ
pagòŋ. Dahil díto tináwag nyà aŋ
kanya ŋ kaybíga ŋ uŋgòʾ at
inyálay nya aŋ ila ŋ 15búŋa naŋ
ságiŋ kuŋ àakyatin nyà aŋ
púnoʾ. Aŋ uŋgòʾ ay umakyàt
at kumáin naŋ
makàkáya.
|
When a few days had passed, the monkey’s tree
died, while that of the turtle grew until it bore fruit. The bananas
grew ripe, but the turtle could not climb for them. Therefore he called
his friend, the monkey, and offered him some of the fruits of the
banana, if he would climb the tree. The monkey climbed up and ate for
all he was worth.
|
|
Sinábi naŋ
pagòŋ: “Hulúgan mo akò.”
|
Said the turtle: “Throw me some.”
|
|
Dátapuwat
isinagòt naŋ uŋgòʾ: “Balat
màn at malinamnàm ay
hindí kita hùhulúgan.”
|
But the monkey answered: “Though sweet the skins,
I’d throw you none.”
|
|
20Aŋ pagòŋ ay nagálit at
nagsábug sya naŋ tinìk sa palígid naŋ púnoʾ. Naŋ
lumuksò aŋ uŋgò ay nátinik syà.
Pinagbintaŋan nyà aŋ
pagòŋ at kanya ŋ hinánap úpaŋ
parusáhan niyà. Nàhúli nya aŋ pagòŋ sa kabilà naŋ
isa ŋ toòd.
|
The turtle got angry and scattered spines round the foot
of the tree. When the monkey jumped down, he landed on the spines. He
suspected the turtle and looked for him, in order to punish him. He
found the turtle behind a stump.
|
|
Sinábi nya sa
pagòŋ: “Kità ay áki ŋ
parùrusáhan. Mamíli 25ka sa dalawà.
Dikdikìn kità sa lusòŋ o lunúrin
kità sa ílog?”
|
Said he to the turtle: “I am going to punish you.
Choose between the two: shall I bray you in a mortar or drown you in
the river?”
|
|
Aŋ
marúnoŋ na pagòŋ ay nagumpisà naŋ
pagsisigàw at hinilìŋ nya sa uŋgòʾ na,
kuŋ maàáreʾ, ay dikdikìn siya sa
lusòŋ.
|
The clever turtle began to shout and begged the monkey,
if it were possible, to bray him in a mortar.
|
|
Dátapwat
isinagòt naŋ uŋgòʾ: “Ibíbigay
kò sa iyò aŋ parúsa na hindí mo gustò.”
|
But the monkey answered: “I shall give you the
punishment you don’t want.”
|
|
30At inihágis nya sa ílog aŋ
pagòŋ.
|
And he threw the turtle into the river.
|
|
Naŋ dumápo
aŋ pagòŋ sa túbig ay nagsisigàw sya at
sinábi nyà sa
uŋgòʾ: “Salámat, kaybígan.
Itò aŋ áki ŋ tìráhan!”
|
When the turtle arrived in the water, he set up a shout
and said to the monkey: “Thank you, friend! This is my home.”
Note. p. 16, l. 2 aŋ
pagòŋ hábaŋ nalìlígoʾ
is unusual and no doubt traditional for hábaŋ aŋ pagòŋ ay
nalìlígoʾ. Similarly, p. 16, l. 18
Balat màn at malinamnàm ... is
traditional (proverbial) for modern Káhit na
malinamnàm aŋ maŋa balàt.
|
|
2. Aŋ pagtatakbúhan naŋ usà at
naŋ susòʾ.
|
2. The race of the deer
and the snail.
|
|
Isà ŋ
usà ŋ naŋìŋináin sa gúbat ay
nakátagpò naŋ isa ŋ susòʾ na gumàgápaŋ sa
dáhon naŋ búhoʾ. Aŋ usà ay
naghintò naŋ paŋiŋináin at pinagmasdàn
nyà aŋ mabágal na paggápaŋ naŋ
5susòʾ.
|
A deer, grazing in the jungle, came upon a snail
that was creeping over the leaf of a bamboo-plant. The deer ceased from
his grazing and watched the slow creeping of the snail.
|
|
Makaraàn aŋ
ila ŋ sandalìʾ ay sinábi nyà sa
susòʾ: “Ano ŋ hína mo ŋ lumákad! Bákit
hindí ka magáral na lumákad naŋ matúlin? Gáya ko, akù y
paráti ŋ nàhàhábul naŋ maŋa
áso, dátapwat aŋ
matúlin ko ŋ pagtakbò ay sya ŋ
naglíligtàs sa ákin 10naŋ áki ŋ
búhay. Dátapwat gáya mò, kuŋ
ikàw ay habúlin naŋ káhit anò ŋ kaáway,
papáno aŋ maŋyàyári sa iyo ŋ
búhay? Pího ŋ
ikàw ay màpàpatày.”
|
When a few moments had passed, he said to the snail:
“How slowly you walk! Why don’t you learn to walk faster?
Look at me,—I am often pursued by dogs, but my swift running is
what saves my life. But look at you,—if you should be pursued by
any foe, what will ever save your life? Surely you will get
killed.”
|
|
Pagkárinig
naŋ susòʾ sa maŋa salità ŋ itò
ay tiniŋnàn nya aŋ
usà at kanya ŋ pinagarálan aŋ maínam nya
ŋ paŋaŋatawàn, 15aŋ kanya ŋ
mahahába ŋ paà, at aŋ malalakàs nya
ŋ lamàn. Iníbig nya
na siya màn ay gaya rìn naŋ usà
úpaŋ siyà ay makatakbò naŋ matúlin. Dátapwat kanyà
ŋ inakálàʾ na, kuŋ pilítin nya na
sya y tumakbò, ay hindí
sya màhùhulè naŋ malakì sa
usà.
|
When the snail had heard these words, he looked at the
deer and scanned his fine physique, his long legs, and his strong
muscles. He wished that he too might be like the deer, so that he could
run fast. However, he thought that if he forced himself to run, he
should not remain far behind the deer.
|
|
Sa gayòn ay
isinagot nyà sa usà: “Ikàw ay
mapaŋmatà. 20Hindí mo
hinìhinálàʾ kuŋ anò aŋ
magágawa naŋ isa ŋ may matíbay na paggustò. Hinàhámon
kità na makipagtakbúhan sa ákin mula ríto haŋgàŋ sa
ílog na nása bandà ŋ kalunúran
mulà ríto.”
|
Accordingly he answered the deer: “You are
overweening. You do not suspect what can be done by one who has a
strong will. I challenge you to race with me from here to the river
that lies west of here.”
|
|
Aŋ usà ay
tumáwa naŋ malakàs at isinagòt sa
susòʾ: “Bákit mo inakála ŋ tàtalúnin mo
akò? Sigúro ŋ ikàw ay
magdàdáyaʾ!”
|
The deer laughed loudly and answered the snail:
“How can you think you will defeat me? I suppose you are going to
cheat.”
|
|
25Isinagòt naŋ susòʾ, na
hindí siya magdàdáyaʾ, at, úpaŋ
máy-roo ŋ
tumiŋìn sa kanilà at magìŋ hukòm
sa kanila ŋ pagtatakbúhan, ay sinábi nyà na tumáwag silà
naŋ isà sa maŋa kayibígan nilà, na sya ŋ magígiŋ
hukòm.
|
The snail answered that he was not going to cheat, and,
so that there might be someone to watch them and be judge over their
race, he suggested that they call one of their friends to be judge.
|
|
Aŋ usà ay
pumáyag, at tináwag nilà aŋ isa ŋ
kálaw, úpaŋ 30siya
ŋ magìŋ hukòm.
|
The deer agreed, and they called an owl to be judge.
|
|
Naŋ
magumpisà silà naŋ pagtakbò ay malakì
aŋ nagìŋ pagkáhuli naŋ susòʾ. Sa kanyà ŋ
pagtakbò aŋ usà ay nakáraàn naŋ
isa ŋ mayábuŋ na
damúhan. Naghintú sya úpaŋ
maŋináin, yámaŋ malakì aŋ pagkáuna nya sa
susòʾ. Binálak nyà na pagkátanaw
35nya na
dumáratiŋ aŋ susòʾ ay tátakbo
syà ŋ mulìʾ. Dátapuwat, naŋ sya y makapaŋináin, ay
sinumpòŋ sya naŋ katàmáran.
Natúlug sya sa
panukálà na màgìgisiŋ syà
bágo dumatìŋ aŋ susòʾ.
|
When they began to run, the snail was soon left far
behind. On his course the deer came upon a flourishing grass-field. He
stopped to graze, since his start over the snail was so great. He
planned that when he saw the snail coming, he would start running
again. However, when he had done feeding, he was attacked by laziness.
He went to sleep, with the thought that he would wake up before the
snail arrived.
|
|
Dátapwat,
hábaŋ sya y natùtúlog, ay nakaraàn
aŋ susòʾ. Naŋ mágisiŋ syà ay malálim nà
sa hápon. Tumakbo syà naŋ úbus-lakàs
40patúŋu sa ílog, at doòn ay
sinalúboŋ sya naŋ susòʾ at naŋ kanila
ŋ hukòm na kálaw.
|
However, while he was asleep, the snail passed by. When
he awoke, it was already late in the afternoon. He ran with all his
might to the river, and there he was met by the snail and their judge,
the owl.
|
|
“Ikàw ay
talúnan,” winíka pagdáka naŋ kanila
ŋ hukòm.
|
“You are defeated,” said their judge at
once.
|
|
3. Isà ŋ Biyàrnes-Sànto.
|
3. A Good Friday.
|
|
Si Hwàn at
aŋ kanyà ŋ kaybíga ŋ si Pédro ay
namámaŋká sa
ílug patúŋo sa báya-ŋ-Balíwag. Sa
baŋkàʾ ay máy-roon silà ŋ isà ŋ laráwan naŋ
Krísto na kanila ŋ iniháhatid sa páreʾ,
úpaŋ 5magámit sa pagdadáus naŋ isa
ŋ Pitù ŋ Wíkaʾ. Si Hwàn ay sinìsiglàn naŋ
tákot.
|
Juan and his friend Pedro were canoeing on the
river toward the town Baliwag. In their canoe they had an image of
Christ which they were conveying to a priest to be used in the
celebration of a Good Friday Mass. Juan was filled with terror.
|
|
Sinábi nya kay
Pédro: “Aŋ táwu nátin sa
baŋkàʾ ay tadtàd naŋ súgat at hindí
humíhiŋà. Sa akálà ko y patày
aŋ táo ŋ iyàn.
Baká táyu aŋ pagbintaŋàn naŋ
pári ŋ áti ŋ paghàhatdàn
10sa kanyà.”
|
Said he to Pedro: “This man of ours in the canoe
is all chopped up with wounds and no longer breathing. I think this man
is a corpse. I am afraid we shall be suspected by the priest to whom we
are delivering him.”
|
|
Isinagòt ni
Pédro: “Sàsabíhin nátin sa
kanyà na, naŋ màlúlan sa áti ŋ baŋkàʾ aŋ
táo ŋ itò y ganyan nà aŋ kanya ŋ
anyòʾ. Táyu y
marámi ŋ tagapagpatotoò, kanyá hwag kà
ŋ matákot.”
|
Pedro answered: “We shall tell him that when this
man was loaded into our canoe, he was already in this condition. We
have many witnesses, so don’t be afraid.”
|
|
Naŋ
dumatìŋ sila sa páreʾ, ay ibinigày nila
aŋ laráwan. 15Pinagsabíhan silà naŋ
páreʾ na pumaroòn sila sa simbáhan
kinàbukásan naŋ
hápon, úpaŋ makinìg naŋ
sèrmon.
|
When they reached the priest they gave him the image.
The priest told them to come to church the next day in the afternoon to
hear the sermon.
|
|
Si Hwàn ay
siniglà ŋ mulí naŋ tákot,
sapagkàt hindí nya màpagkúro kuŋ bákit íbig
naŋ páreʾ na silà ay pása
simbáhan. Paráti sya
ŋ nakárinig naŋ maŋa táo ŋ
kinumbidà sa simbáhan 20at doòn ay
hinúli naŋ gwàrdya-sibìl. Dátapuwat
hindí sya nagwíka naŋ anu màn kay Pédro, sapagkàt
nàkìkíta nya na itò y walà ŋ
tákot.
|
Juan was again filled with terror, for he could not make
out why the priest wanted them to go to the church. He had often heard
of men being summoned to the church and there seized by the gendarmes.
However, he did not say anything to Pedro, for he saw that the latter
had no fear.
|
|
Kinàbukásan naŋ hápun ay
naparoòn sila sa simbáhan, at doòn ay nàkíta nilà aŋ
isa ŋ Krísto ŋ nàpàpákù sa
krùs.
|
On the next day in the afternoon they went to church,
and there they saw a Christ nailed to the cross.
|
|
25Winíkà ni Hwàn: “Aŋ
táu ŋ yaòn, kuŋ iyò ŋ
natàtandaàn, ay sya
náti ŋ inihatìd sa páreʾ. Mabúti
táyo y dumoòn sa isa ŋ lugàr na hindí maáabut
naŋ matà naŋ páreʾ.”
|
Said Juan: “That man, if you remember, is the one
we delivered to the priest. We had better go to some place out of sight
of the priest.”
|
|
Kanyá
silà ŋ dalawà ay naparoòn sa ilálim
naŋ pùlpito, úpaŋ doòn nilà pakiŋgàn aŋ
sèrmon. Nagumpisà aŋ Syéti-Palábras,
30at
aŋ párì ay dumáratiŋ nà sa
bandà ŋ hulì naŋ kanya ŋ
sèrmon.
|
So the two of them went under the pulpit, to hear the
sermon from there. The Good Friday Mass began, and the priest was
already getting to the last part of his sermon.
|
|
Winíkà
naŋ pári sa kanya ŋ sèrmon:
“Magsísi kayò sa inyù ŋ maŋa kasalánan, malulupìt na
táo. Masdàn ninyò aŋ maŋa súgat
na hiníwa ninyù sa
katawàn naŋ áti ŋ
Mànanákop.”
|
In his sermon the priest said: “Repent ye of your
sins, cruel people! Behold the wounds which you struck in the body of
our Savior!”
|
|
Pagkárinig
nitò ni Hwàn ay sya y siniglà ŋ mulí
naŋ tákot, 35sapagkàt inakálà nya na siya y
nàpàpagbintaŋàn.
|
When Juan heard this, he was again filled with terror,
for he thought that he had fallen under suspicion.
|
|
Kanyàʾ
aŋ ginawá nya ay umalìs sya sa ilálim
naŋ pùlpito, hinaràp nya aŋ páreʾ, at
sinábi nya: “Ámoŋ, hindí po kamì
aŋ sumúgat sa táo
ŋ iyàn. Naŋ sya y ilúlan sa ámi ŋ
baŋkàʾ, ay sugatan
nà sya antimáno.”
|
Therefore, what he did was to come out from under the
pulpit, face the priest, and say: “Father, we are not the ones
who wounded this man! When he was loaded into our canoe he was already
wounded.”
|
|
40Pagkawíkà nya nitò ay
bumalìk sya sa ilálim naŋ pùlpito. Hindí pinansìn naŋ
párìʾ aŋ maŋa nárinig nya ŋ
salitàʾ, at ipinatúluy nya aŋ kanya ŋ
sèrmon.
|
When he had said this, he went back under the pulpit.
The priest paid no attention to the speech he had heard, and went on
with his sermon.
|
|
“Dumatiŋ
nà aŋ áraw na kayò ŋ maŋa
makasalánan ay dápat magsipagsísi. Aŋ maŋa pintúan
naŋ láŋit ay nábuksan nà sa pagkamatày naŋ áti ŋ
Mànanákop, at káhit na sínu ŋ
makasalánan ay
makapàpásuk sa láŋit, kuŋ sila y
magsipagsísi. Dátapwat, 5kuŋ hindí kayo
magsipagsísi, ay màpàparusáhan kayò
naŋ hírap na wala ŋ
haŋgàn sa maŋa apùy sa infyèrno,
dahilàn sa maŋa hírap
na ipinasákit ninyò sa áti ŋ
Mànanákop. Masdàn ninyò aŋ kanyà ŋ katawàn na
pumàpáwis naŋ dugòʾ, aŋ kanya
ŋ paà t kamày na
nàpàpáko sa krùs, at aŋ kanyà
ŋ maŋa súgat mulá sa 10paà
haŋgàŋ úlo. Wala ŋ ibà ŋ
nagpàpahírap sa kanyà at sumúgat sa kanyà ŋ mahàl na
katawàn, kuŋ hindí kayò, maŋa
táwo ŋ makasalánan,
at, kuŋ hindí kayo magsipagsísi, ay
mahùhúlug kayo sa infyèrno!”
|
“The day has come now, when ye sinners must
repent. The portals of Heaven are open now through the death of
our Savior, and every sinner can enter Heaven, if he repent. But if ye
do not repent, ye shall come to be punished with sufferings without end
in the flames of Hell for the sufferings which ye caused our Savior to
undergo. Behold His body sweating blood, His hands and feet nailed to
the cross, and His wounds from head to feet. No one other caused Him to
suffer and wounded His dear body, than you, ye sinners, and if ye do
not repent, ye shall fall into Hell.”
|
|
Si Hwàn ay
hindí màpalagày, at inakálà nya na
aŋ pári ay 15sinìsilakbuhàn naŋ gálit
lában sa kanyà.
|
Juan could not remain in his place, for he thought that
the priest was overflowing with anger against him.
|
|
Kanyàʾ
hinarap nyà ŋ mulí aŋ páreʾ, at
sinábi nya naŋ úbus-lakàs: “Ámoŋ, sinábi ko na
pòʾ sa inyò kanína na hindí ako kasále ŋ sumúgat sa
táo ŋ iyán, kanyá hwag pò ninyo
akò ŋ ipadalà sa
impyèrno.”
|
So he again faced the priest and said, as loudly as he
could: “Father, only a moment ago I told you that I had no part
in wounding this man, so do not send me, sir, to Hell.”
|
|
20Aŋ pári ay
siniglàn naŋ malakì ŋ gálit,
kanyá sinábi nya sa maŋà nakíkinìg: “Anu ba
kayò, maŋa uŋàs na táo? Walá baga
ní isa sa inyò na
makaháwak sa táo ŋ itò úpaŋ
bigtihìn?”
|
The priest was filled with great anger and said to the
congregation: “What sort of people are you, foolish folk? Is
there not one among you who can take hold of this fellow and choke
him?”
|
|
Pagkárinig nitò ni Hwàn ay tumakbo
syà naŋ úbus-lakàs at sinagasáa ŋ walà ŋ
patumaŋgà aŋ maŋa táo ŋ
nàlùluhòd at umíiyàk 25sa pagsisísi
naŋ kanilà ŋ kasalánan. Sinundan syà ni
Pédro at silà ŋ
dalawà ay nagtakbúhan naŋ wala ŋ hintò
haŋgàŋ sa dumatìŋ sila sa kanila ŋ báyan. At doòn ay
ipinamalítà nila aŋ bútas-karáyum
na niligtasàn nilà.
|
When Juan heard this, he ran with all his might,
trampling without regard the people who were kneeling and weeping in
repentance of their sins. He was followed by Pedro, and the two ran
together, without stopping, until they reached their home town. And
there they told the story of their narrow escape.
|
|
4. Aŋ kúbaʾ at aŋ
bulàg.
|
4. The hunchback and the
blindman.
|
|
30Isa ŋ kúbaʾ at isa ŋ
bulàg ay matálik na magkaybígan. Kuŋ sila y naglálakàd aŋ
kúbaʾ aŋ umàákay sa bulàg.
Aŋ bulàg namàn ay
syà ŋ pumápasàn sa kúbà
kuŋ máy-roon silà ŋ mahírap na nilàlakáran,
sapagkàt aŋ kúbaʾ ay mahínaʾ
aŋ katawàn.
|
A hunchback and a blindman were close friends.
When they walked, the hunchback led the blindman; the blindman, on the
other hand, carried the hunchback on his shoulders, when they had a
hard road to travel, for the hunchback was weak of body.
|
|
Mínsan sila y
nakáraàn naŋ isà ŋ
púno-ŋ-nyòg. Íbig nila ŋ 35pumitàs
naŋ búŋa, dátapuwat hindí nila
màláman kuŋ síno sa kanilà ŋ dalawà aŋ
áakyàt sa púnòʾ. Sinábi
naŋ bulàg na hindí sya makaáakyàt, sapagkàt hindí
nya màkìkíta kuŋ alìn aŋ
pìpitasín, yámaŋ máy-roo ŋ maŋa
múra ŋ búŋa. Aŋ kúbaʾ ay hindi
rìn íbig umakyàt,
dahilàn sa kanyà ŋ kahináan. Dátapuwat
malakì aŋ
pagkágusto nyà na kumáin naŋ nyòg.
Kanyàʾ, sa katapusàn ay sinábi nya na
siyà aŋ áakyàt.
|
Once they came upon a cocoanut-tree. They wanted to pick
some of the fruits, but they did not know which of the two of them
should be the one to climb the tree. The blindman said that he should
not be able to climb, because he should not be able to see which fruits
to pick, since there were many unripe fruits. The hunchback also did
not want to climb, on account of his weakness. However, he was very
eager to eat of the cocoanuts, so, finally, he said to the
blindman that he would do the climbing.
|
|
“Úpaŋ
huwag kà ŋ mànakáwan naŋ maŋa
ilálaglag kò ŋ búŋa, ay bìbiláŋin mo
naŋ malakàs aŋ kalabùg sa lúpa naŋ
maŋa 5búŋa na ilálaglag kò,
úpaŋ áki ŋ matandaàn aŋ
bílaŋ.”
|
“To prevent your being robbed of the fruits which
I shall throw down, do you count out loud the thud on the ground of the
fruits as I drop them, so that I may keep track of the
number.”
|
|
Aŋ kúba ay
nagumpisà naŋ pagakyàt, dátapwat
paŋaŋalahátì nya
ay nahúlug syà.
|
The hunchback began to climb, but when he was half-way
up, he fell down.
|
|
“Isà!”
aŋ sábi naŋ bulàg.
|
“One!” said the blindman.
|
|
Sinábi sa
kanyà naŋ kúbàʾ na siyà aŋ
kumalabòg at hindí aŋ 10búŋa naŋ nyòg.
|
The hunchback told him that it was he who had made the
thud and not a cocoanut.
|
|
Umakyàt sya
ulèʾ. Pagkaraàn naŋ ila ŋ
sandalìʾ ay nahúlog ulí sya.
|
He climbed again. After a few moments he took another
fall.
|
|
“Dalawà!” isinigàw naŋ
bulàg.
|
“Two!” shouted the blindman.
|
|
Aŋ kúba ay
nagálit, at sinábi nya sa bulàg na syà ay
maúlit.
|
The hunchback got angry and told the blindman that he
was stubborn.
|
|
15Winíkà nya: “Iyo ŋ
úna ŋ kumalabòg ay akò, aŋ
ikalawà ay ako rìn.
Kanyàʾ, wala pà ŋ niyòg akò
ŋ nàpìpitàs.”
|
He said: “That first thing that made a thud was I,
and the second one was I again; I haven’t yet picked any
cocoanuts.”
|
|
Dátapuwat
aŋ bulàg ay nagakála ŋ gawì ŋ
katatawanàn aŋ pagkahúlog naŋ kúbaʾ. Kanyá
binálak nya na, kuŋ makárinig syà ulè naŋ kalabòg, ay
sísigaw syà naŋ “Tatlò!”
|
But the blindman planned to make fun of the
hunchback’s falls. So he decided that, when he again heard a
thud, he would cry “Three!”
|
|
20Aŋ kúba ay
umakyàt na mulìʾ, dátapwat nahúlog
dìn syà. Aŋ
bulàg ay sumigàw naŋ “Tatlò!” at
tumáwa sya. Aŋ kúba ay nagínit naŋ gálit. Nilapítan
nya aŋ bulàg at kanyà ŋ sinampàl sa mukhàʾ. Aŋ sampàl
ay tumáma sa maŋa matà naŋ bulàg, at
dáhil díto ay
nadílat aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa matà.
25Úpaŋ maŋhigantì sya ay
sinípà nya aŋ kúbaʾ. Tinamaan nyà
itò sa likòd at
dáhil díto ay nàúnat aŋ kanya ŋ
kúbaʾ.
|
The hunchback climbed again, but again fell. The
blindman cried “Three!” and laughed.
The hunchback grew hot with anger. He went up to the
blindman and slapped him in the face. The slap hit the blindman’s
eyes, and through it his eyes came open. To take revenge he kicked the
hunchback. He struck him on the back, and through this his hump was
straightened out.
|
|
Silà ŋ
dalawà ay natwá sa naŋyári at lálo
ŋ tumíbay aŋ kanila
ŋ pagkakaybígan sa lugàr naŋ magkasirá
silà.
|
They both rejoiced at what had happened, and their
friendship grew all the closer, instead of their becoming enemies.
|
|
5. Aŋ hári ŋ may súŋay at
si Hwàn.
|
5. The king who had horns
and Juan.
|
|
30Sa isà ŋ kapuluwàn
naghàhári aŋ isa ŋ táwu ŋ may
dalawà ŋ maiiklì
ŋ
súŋay na nàtàtágù sa
malagú nya ŋ buhòk. Hindí itò nàlàláman naŋ kanya ŋ
maŋa pinaghàharían. Dátapwat aŋ
líhim na ytò y
nagumpisà ŋ nàibadyà sa madlàʾ sa
pamamagítan naŋ maŋa
maŋgugúpit na nakàpútul naŋ kanyà
ŋ buhòk.
|
On a group of islands there ruled a man who had
two short horns hidden in his thick hair. This was not known to his
subjects, but the secret began to spread among the people by way of the
barbers who had cut his hair.
|
|
35Kanyá sya y nagkaroòn naŋ malaki
ŋ gálit sa maŋa barbéro, at inakálà nya ŋ lipúlin aŋ
maŋa barbéro sa kanya ŋ kaharyàn. Iniyútus nya ŋ humúkay
naŋ ápat na malálim na balòn sa
harapàn naŋ kanya ŋ
tìráhan, at sa gitná naŋ ápat na
húkay na yitò ay nagpalagày sya naŋ isa ŋ
ùpúan. Isa ŋ áraw naupó sya sa
taburéte 40sa gitná naŋ ápat na
húkay, at báwat táo ŋ nagdaàn ay
tinanùŋ
nya kuŋ marúnuŋ maŋgupìt. Aŋ
báwat sumagòt naŋ “Óo” ay pinahintú nya
úpaŋ bigyàn nya naŋ guntìŋ at
syà y gupitàn.
Pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ sandalìʾ ay
itinanùŋ nya sa báwat maŋgugúpit kuŋ anò aŋ
nàkìkíta nya sa úlo naŋ
háreʾ. Aŋ maŋa 5maŋgugúpit ay
nagsipagsábi naŋ katotohánan at báwat
isà sa kanilà ay sumagòt naŋ
súŋay aŋ kanila ŋ nàkìkíta.
Aŋ báwat sumagòt
naŋ ganitò ay ibinulìd naŋ háreʾ sa
isà sa maŋa húkay sa
palígid niyà.
|
On account of this he conceived a great anger against
barbers and planned to exterminate the barbers in his kingdom. He
ordered four deep wells dug in front of his residence, and in the
center between the four pits he had a seat placed. One day he sat down
on the chair between the four pits, and asked everyone who passed
whether he knew how to cut hair. Whenever anyone said
“Yes,” he stopped him, gave him a pair of shears, and had
him cut his hair. After a little while he asked each hair-cutter
what he saw on his, the king’s, head. The hair-cutters all told
the truth, and each one of them answered that he saw horns. Every one
who answered thus was pushed by the king into one of the pits that were
round him.
|
|
Nakaraàn aŋ
ila ŋ áraw at aŋ dalawà ŋ húkay ay
napunú 10nà naŋ maŋa barbéro at
pinatabúnan na nyà. Dumálaŋ aŋ maŋa
tao ŋ nagdádaàn na
marúnuŋ maŋgupìt, at aŋ háre ay
nagakála ŋ nápatay
nà niya ŋ lahàt aŋ maŋa barbéro sa
kanyà ŋ kaharyàn.
|
A few days passed and two of the pits were already
filled with barbers and were ordered by the king to be filled up with
earth. The passers-by who knew how to cut hair grew scarce, and the
king thought he had already killed all the barbers in his kingdom.
|
|
Isa ŋ áraw
ay naghintày sya sa kanya ŋ ùpúan
haŋgàŋ kataŋhalían bágo nagdaàn aŋ
isa ŋ táo na nagsábi ŋ sya y
marúnuŋ 15gumupìt naŋ buhòk.
|
One day he waited on his seat until mid-day, before a
man came by who said he knew how to cut hair.
|
|
Itinanùŋ sa
kanyà naŋ háreʾ: “Anò aŋ
paŋálan mo?”
|
The king asked him: “What is your name?”
|
|
Isinagòt naŋ táo: “Aŋ
paŋálan ko pòʾ ay Hwàn.”
|
The man answered: “My name, sir, is
Juan.”
|
|
“Gupitàn
mo akò, Hwàn,” iniyútus naŋ
háreʾ.
|
“Cut my hair, Juan,” commanded the king.
|
|
Lumápit si
Hwàn sa háreʾ at inumpisahan nyà aŋ
paŋgugupìt. 20
|
Juan approached the king and began to cut his hair.
|
|
Makaraàn aŋ
ila ŋ sandalìʾ ay itinanùŋ naŋ
háreʾ: “Anò aŋ
nàkìkíta mo sa úlo ko,
Hwàn?”
|
After a short time the king asked: “What do you
see on my head, Juan?”
|
|
Aŋ kanya ŋ
sagòt ay ganitò: “Aŋ iyo pò ŋ
Kamàhálan, nàkìkíta ko sa úlo
ninyò aŋ koróna.”
|
His reply was thus: “Your Majesty, I see on your
head the crown.”
|
|
25Itò ay ikinatuwá naŋ
háreʾ. Kanyá nagtindig syà sa
ùpúan at inákay
nya si Hwàn sa kanya ŋ palásiyo at ginawá nya
si Hwàn na barbéro
naŋ háreʾ. Malakì aŋ suwèldu na
ibinigày nya kay Hwàn,
at pinatabúnan nya aŋ maŋa
nàtìtirà ŋ húkay.
|
This made the king glad. Therefore he got up from his
seat and led Juan into his palace and made Juan barber royal. He gave
Juan large wages and had the remaining pits filled up.
|
|
6. Tatlò ŋ estudyànte.
|
6. Three students.
|
|
30Si Hwàn, si Pédro, at si Andrès
ay tatlò ŋ magkakayibíga ŋ estudyànte ŋ magkababáyan. Naŋ
dumatìŋ aŋ pagbubukàs naŋ maŋa pàaralàn ay
nàláman nilà na silà ay
magkàkahiwá-hiwalày. Iba t ibà ŋ báyan aŋ
kapàpatuŋúhan naŋ báwat isà sa
kanilà. Bágo silà
naghiwá-hiwalày ay nagtìpánan silà
naŋ pagtàtagpuàn 35nila ŋ lugàr
paguumpisà naŋ bakasyòn.
|
Juan, Pedro, and Andrés were three students
from the same town who were friends. When the opening of the schools
came, they knew that they would part: each one of them was to go to a
different town. Before they parted, they appointed a place where they
would meet at the beginning of the vacation.
|
|
Nakaraàn aŋ
isa ŋ taòn at dumatìŋ aŋ pagsasarà
naŋ kláse at aŋ
maŋa estudyànte ay naguwían sa
kaní-kanilà ŋ báyan, at aŋ tatlò
ŋ magkakaybíga ŋ si Pédro, si Hwàn, at
si Andrès ay nagtatagpò
sa báya ŋ tinubúan ni Pédro, úpaŋ
doòn sila magpalípas 40naŋ bakasyòn.
|
A year passed, the closing of the schools arrived, the
students returned to their home towns, and the three friends, Pedro,
Juan, and Andrés met in the town where Pedro had been brought
up, to spend the vacation there.
|
|
Naŋ silà y
magkikíta, pagkaraàn naŋ iba t ibà ŋ
bágay na kanilà ŋ
pinagusápan, ay nagsiyásat silà kuŋ
ganò aŋ nàtutúhan naŋ báwat isà sa kanila ŋ
pagaáral naŋ wíka ŋ Kastílaʾ.
Sinábi ni Pédro na syà ay marámi ŋ
nàlàláma ŋ salità ŋ
Kastílaʾ, dátapuwat 5aŋ maígi nya
ŋ natàtandaàn ay aŋ salità ŋ
“Bámos.”
|
When they came together, after discussing various
matters, they inquired how much each of them had learned in his study
of the Spanish language. Pedro said that he knew a great many
Spanish words, but that which he remembered best was the word
“Vamos.”
|
|
Sumagòt namàn si Hwàn: “Ako
màn ay marámi rì ŋ
nàlàláman, dátapuwat sa ŋayòn aŋ
nààalaála ko ay aŋ salità ŋ
‘Matàr.’”
|
Juan in turn answered: “I too know a great deal,
but what I recall just now is the word ‘Matar.’”
|
|
Si Andrès namàn ay nagwíka ŋ
walá sya ŋ nàtutúhan kuŋ 10hindí aŋ salità ŋ
“Sì.”
|
Andrés said that he had learned nothing except
the word “Si.”
|
|
Makaraàn aŋ
kanila ŋ pagsasàlitáan ay nagyayá si
Pédro na sila ay
mamaŋká sa ílog at magsipalígo tulòy.
Naŋ sila y namámaŋká na sa ílog, sa paŋpàŋ ay
nakátanaw silà naŋ isà ŋ
Kastílàʾ na
íbig malígoʾ. Sinábi ni Pédro na
mabúti ay makipagúsap silà 15sa Kastílaʾ,
úpaŋ sa gayù y màipakíta nilà
aŋ kaní-kanilà ŋ dúnoŋ.
|
After their conversation Pedro suggested that they go
boating on the river and take a bath.
When they were boating on the river, they saw on the
bank a Spaniard who wanted to bathe. Pedro said it would be a good idea
to speak to the Spaniard, so that each one of them might show his
knowledge.
|
|
Nagumpisà si Pédro at sinábi nya
ŋ “Bámos!”
|
Pedro began and said “Vamos!”
|
|
Si Hwàn namàn ay sumagòt:
“Matàr!”
|
Juan answered “Matar!”
|
|
At sa hulè ay si
Andrès aŋ kanya ŋ “Sì!”
|
And last came Andrés with his
“Si!”
|
|
Naŋ márinig
itò naŋ Kastílaʾ, ay siniglàn sya
naŋ tákot, 20sapagkàt inakálà nya na
pàpataìn sya naŋ tatlò ŋ
namámaŋkàʾ. Kanyá, káhit na hindí sya
marúnuŋ lumaŋòy, ay nagtalòn sya sa
ílog at sya y
nalúnod.
|
When the Spaniard heard this, he was filled with terror,
for he thought that the three canoers were going to kill him.
Therefore, even though he did not know how to swim, he jumped into the
river and was drowned.
|
|
7. Isa ŋ sundálu ŋ marúnuŋ
naŋ Latìn.
|
7. A soldier who knew
Latin.
|
|
Tatlò
ŋ magkakayibígan, isa ŋ párèʾ, isa
ŋ maŋgagámut, at 25isa ŋ sundálu,
ay magkakasáma ŋ nagsipamarìl naŋ
maiílap na háyup sa
isà ŋ maláwak na gúbat. Aŋ gúbat
ay maláyù sa báyan. Kanyàʾ silà ay nagdalà naŋ
marámi ŋ báon, úpaŋ hwag silà
ŋ gutúmin.
Nakaraàn aŋ
ila ŋ áraw, dátapuwat walá pa sila ŋ
nàhùhúli 30káhit anò.
Aŋ kanila ŋ báon ay umuntí naŋ
umuntìʾ haŋgàŋ sa walà ŋ nátira kuŋ hindí isa
ŋ hilàw na itlòg. Dumatìŋ sa
kanilà aŋ áraw
naŋ malaki ŋ gútom, dátapuwat sila ŋ
tatlò ay walà ŋ pagkáin kuŋ hindí aŋ itlòg
lámaŋ na nàtìtirà.
|
Three friends, a priest, a physician, and a
soldier, went together to shoot wild game in a deep jungle. As the
jungle was far from the town, they carried plenty of provisions, so as
not to be in want of food. A few days passed without their bagging
anything. Their provisions grew less and less, until there was nothing
left except one raw egg. There came to them the day of great hunger,
but the three had no food except the egg that was left.
|
|
Sinábi naŋ
páreʾ na, kuŋ paghatían nilà aŋ isa
ŋ itlòg, ay 35hindí makabùbúti sa
kanilà, sapagkàt hindí
makapàpáwiʾ naŋ kaní-kanila ŋ gútom.
Kaniyàʾ ipináyu naŋ párìʾ na
isà lámaŋ sa kanilà ŋ tatlò
aŋ kumáin naŋ itlòg na
nàtìtirà,—at sa kanya ŋ kasakimàn ay ipináyu nya na kuŋ
sínu sa kanilà aŋ pinakamahúsay na magsalitá naŋ Latìn ay
sya lámaŋ kàkáin naŋ itlòg.
Inakálà nya na aŋ
sundálu ay hindí marúnuŋ naŋ
Latìn at aŋ médiko
lámaŋ aŋ sya nyà ŋ
màkàkatálo, at aŋ dúnoŋ
nitò y kanya ŋ
minámatà.
|
The priest said that, if they divided the one egg, it
would do them no good, for it would not slacken their hunger. Therefore
the priest suggested that only one of them should eat the remaining
egg, and in his selfishness he suggested that whichever of them was
best at speaking Latin should eat the egg all by himself. He thought
that the soldier did not know Latin, and the doctor alone would be his
opponent, and his knowledge he held in contempt.
|
|
Aŋ médiko y
umáyun sa hátul naŋ párìʾ,
dátapuwat aŋ 5sundálu ay áyaw pumáyag,
sapagkàt hindí sya nagáral na gáya naŋ páriʾ at naŋ
médiko; ŋúnit walá sya ŋ
magawàʾ.
|
The doctor agreed to the advice of the priest, but the
soldier did not want to consent, for he had not studied like the priest
and the doctor, but there was nothing for him to do.
|
|
Kinúha naŋ
párìʾ aŋ itlùg at itinuktòk nya
sa isa ŋ batò. Naŋ
mabásag aŋ itlòg ay sinábi nyà:
“Koronátum est,” at tiniŋnàn nyà
aŋ dalawà nya ŋ kasáma.
|
The priest took the egg and tapped it against a stone.
When the egg was broken, he said: “Coronatum
est,” and looked at his two companions.
|
|
10Inabùt naŋ médiko aŋ
basàg na itlòg, inalis nyà aŋ balàt na
basàg at nilagyan nyà
naŋ asìn at kanya ŋ sinábi:
“Sàltum est.”
|
The doctor took the broken egg, removed the broken part
of the shell, put on some salt, and said: “Saltum
est.”
|
|
Iniyabùt
naŋ maŋgagámot sa sundálu aŋ itlùg,
at aŋ páre at siyà
ay naghintày naŋ sàsabíhin naŋ
sundálo. Itò y walà ŋ màláma
15ŋ
sabíhin, sapagkàt katunáya ŋ walá sya
ŋ nàlàláman káhit isa ŋ hóta tuŋkùl sa
Latìn. Sa kanya ŋ pagiisìp ay nàalaála
nya na, mínsan pumásuk
sya sa simbáhan úpaŋ makinìg naŋ
Syéti-Palábras, ay
nárinig nyà sa párìʾ na aŋ
kahulugàn naŋ salità ŋ “Konsumátum
est” ay “Tapus nà
aŋ lahàt.”
20Kanyà ibinúhos nya sa kanyà
ŋ bibìg aŋ itlòg, at pagkalaguk nyà ay
kanya ŋ sinábi: “Konsumátum est.”
|
The physician handed the egg to the soldier, and the
priest and he waited for what the soldier would say.
The latter did not know what to say, for he really did
not know a single iota of Latin. In his cogitation he remembered that
once, when he went to church to hear the Good Friday Mass, he heard
from the priest that the meaning of the words “Consummatum est” was “It is all over
now.” So he poured the egg into his mouth and, when he had
swallowed it, he said: “Consummatum
est.”
|
|
Aŋ dalawà
nya ŋ kasáma ay nàpagúlat naŋ
malakì sa hindí nila
hininála ŋ dúnuŋ naŋ sundálo.
|
His two companions were greatly astonished at the
learning of the soldier, which they had by no means suspected.
|
|
8. Aŋ pitù ŋ dwènde.
|
8. The seven dwarves.
|
|
25Isà ŋ magasáwa ay máy-roo
ŋ pitù ŋ anàk na dwènde. Aŋ amà ay walà ŋ
trabáho at hindí rìn siya makàkíta
naŋ trabáho. Aŋ
inà namàn ay hindí kumìkíta naŋ
salapìʾ, sapagkàt mahínaʾ aŋ kanyà ŋ katawàn at
paráti sa sakìt.
|
A certain married couple had seven children who
were dwarves. The father was out of work and could not find any. The
mother also was not earning any money, for her body was weak and often
sick.
|
|
Isa ŋ
taŋháliʾ sila y nàùupú sa isa
ŋ baŋkòʾ at pinagùusápan 30nilà
aŋ kanila ŋ pamumúhay na pinagdàdaanàn.
Itinanùŋ naŋ laláke kuŋ anò aŋ mabúte
nila ŋ gawìn sa kanila ŋ maràmi ŋ
anàk. Ipináyu naŋ
babáye na kanilà ŋ ihánap naŋ
trabáho aŋ maŋa bátaʾ, úpaŋ kumíta
silà naŋ kwaltà. Dátapuwat isinagòt
naŋ laláki na sa akálà nya ay hindí
sila makàkìkíta naŋ trabáho,
sapagkàt 35siya rìn ay wala
ŋ màkíta. Kanyàʾ ipináyu
nyà na aŋ mabúti ay
itápun nilà aŋ maŋa bátaʾ.
|
One noon they were sitting on a bench and discussing the
life they were leading. The man asked what they had better do with
their many children. The woman suggested that they should look for work
for their children, so that they might earn money. But the man answered
that, in his opinion, they would not be able to find any work, since he
himself had not been able to find any. Therefore he suggested that they
had better abandon their children.
|
|
Itò y
ikinaluŋkòt at ikináiyàk naŋ
babáye. Áyaw sya ŋ pumáyag na itápon aŋ maŋa
bátaʾ. Dátapuwat ipinakíta sa kanyà naŋ kanyà ŋ
asáwa na, kuŋ hindí nila gawìn iyòn,
sila ŋ lahàt ay
mamámatay naŋ
gútom. Sa kalaúnan ay pumáyag aŋ babáe at pinagkàsunduàn
nila na dalhìn nila ŋ magpasyàl aŋ maŋa bátaʾ at kanila ŋ
íwan sa daàn.
|
This made the woman grieve and weep. She would not
consent to abandon the children. But her husband made it clear to her
that, if they did not do this, they would all die of hunger. Finally
the woman consented and they agreed that they would take their children
for a walk and leave them on the way.
|
|
Hábaŋ
pinagùusápan nilà itò, aŋ
ikapitù ŋ bátà ay nása isà
5ŋ
bitàk naŋ baŋkò na kanila ŋ
inùupàn at nárinig nya ŋ lahàt aŋ gàgawin sa kanilà
naŋ kanila ŋ magúlaŋ. Pagkaraàn naŋ
kanilà ŋ
sàlitáan ay hinánap pagdáka naŋ
báta aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa kapatìd at ibinalítà nya aŋ kanya
ŋ nárinìg. Silà ay nagìyákan,
sapagkàt hindí
ipinaálam sa kanilà naŋ kanila ŋ
magúlaŋ na silà 10ay nakabíbigat sa
kanila ŋ pamumúhay. Inakálà nila na, kuŋ
itò y nàláman
nilà, káhit na papáno tùtúloŋ
sila ŋ maghánap naŋ
kabuháyan. Dátapuwat pinagkàsunduwan nilà
na silà y sumáma pag
niyáyà sila ŋ magsipagpasyàl at
paligàw silà.
|
While they were discussing this, the seventh child was
in a crack of the bench on which they were sitting and heard
what their parents were going to do to them. After they had finished
talking, the child at once looked for his brothers and sisters and told
them what he had heard. They all wept, because their parents had not
told them that they were a burden to their life. They thought that, if
they had known this, they would have done anything whatever to help
them gain a living. However, they agreed that they would go along, if
they were asked to go walking, and would allow themselves to be led
astray.
|
|
Kinàbukásan hinánap silà
naŋ kanilà ŋ amà, pinapagbíhis 15sila,
binigyàn sila naŋ maŋa púto, at sinábi
ŋ sila y magsísipagpasyàl. Naŋ silà y magumpisà aŋ
ikapitò ŋ báta ay hindí kináin aŋ kanya ŋ tinápay,
dátapuwat magmulá sa kanila ŋ
tàraŋkáhan ay
dinúrog nya aŋ tinápay at ibinudbòd nya sa
daà ŋ kanila ŋ nilakáran. Naŋ sila y málayú
nà ay naubúsan sya naŋ tinápay, 20kanyá
naŋhiŋí sya sa kanya ŋ maŋa kapatìd.
Dátapwat hindí nila syà binigyàn.
Itò namàn ay hindí sinábi sa kanilà
kuŋ bákit sya
naubúsan agàd naŋ tinápay. Naŋ
hindí sya makáhiŋì naŋ tinápay ay namúlot sya naŋ
maŋa batò, at itò y sya nyà ŋ
isa-isà ŋ inilaglàg
sa kanila ŋ pinagdaánan.
|
On the next day their father came to them, told them to
get dressed, gave them some cakes, and told them that they should all
go for a walk. When they started out, the seventh child did not eat his
bread, but, starting at their gate, he crumbled it and scattered it
along the road which they were walking. When they had gone some
distance, he ran out of bread and asked his brothers and sisters for
some. But they did not give him any. He did not tell them why he had
run out of bread so soon. When he could get no bread, he picked up
stones and these he dropped one by one on their path.
|
|
25Naŋ dumatìŋ sila sa isa ŋ
gúbat ay iníwan silà naŋ kanilà ŋ magúlaŋ at
pinagsabíhan silà na hantayìn sila doòn, at
silà y bábalik
agàd. Silà y naíwan, dátapwat
nàlàláman nilà na hindí sila pagbàbalikàn naŋ
kanila ŋ magúlaŋ.
|
When they came to a jungle, their parents left them,
telling them to wait for them there and that they would soon come back.
Their parents left them, but they knew that their parents would not
come back to them.
|
|
Naŋ makaraàn aŋ ila ŋ
sandalìʾ, ay nakárinig silà naŋ isa
ŋ 30íŋay. Pinuntahàn nilà
aŋ lugàr na pinaŋgàgalíŋan naŋ
íŋay. Doòn ay
nàkíta nilà aŋ isa ŋ malakì
ŋ higànte na nalìlígo sa tabi naŋ isa
ŋ balòn. Tiniŋnàn nila aŋ
palígid-lígid naŋ lugàr, at sa tabì naŋ isa ŋ káhuy ay
nàkíta nilà aŋ pananamìt naŋ
higànte. Aŋ ikapitù
ŋ bàta ay pinaalìs aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa
kapatìd at sinábi 35nya na magtágo
silà at kanyà ŋ nànakáwin aŋ
sapátos naŋ higànte. Itò ay kanila ŋ ginawàʾ, at
ninákaw naŋ báta aŋ sapátos.
|
When a short time had passed, they heard a noise. They
went toward the place from which the noise came. There they saw a great
giant bathing by the side of a well. They looked round about the place,
and by the side of a tree they saw the clothes of the giant. The
seventh child sent his brothers and sisters away and told them to hide,
and he would steal the giant’s shoes. They did this and the child
stole the shoes.
|
|
Naŋ
makapalígoʾ aŋ higànte at siyà y
nagbìbíhis ay hindí nya màkíta aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa
sapátos. Sya y nagálit at nagmurà. Tumáwag sya naŋ túloŋ.
Naŋ itò y márinìg naŋ numákaw
naŋ sapátos ay
dali-dáli sya ŋ dumalò. Naŋ
màkíta sya naŋ higànte ay hindí sya pinagbintaŋàn,
sapagkàt dahilàn sa kanya ŋ kaliitàn ay inakálà naŋ
higànte ŋ hindí nya madádala aŋ
sapátos.
|
When the giant had finished bathing and was getting
dressed, he could not find his shoes. He got angry and cursed. He
called for help. When the one who had stolen the shoes heard this, he
quickly approached. When the giant saw him, he did not suspect him,
for, on account of his smallness, the giant thought that he would not
be able to carry the shoes.
|
|
Kanyàʾ
itò y nagwíka sa kanyà: “Kuŋ iyo ŋ
dàdalhìn ito 5ŋ súpot ko naŋ kwaltà sa
áki ŋ asáwa at pabilhìn mo syà
naŋ sapátos at ihatìd
nya sa ákin, ay ùupáhan kità naŋ
marámi ŋ kwàlta.”
|
Therefore the giant said to him: “If you will
carry this bag of money of mine to my wife and tell her to buy some
shoes and to bring them to me, I shall pay you much money.”
|
|
Sinábi
tulòy nya na sya y hindí nakalàlákad
naŋ wala ŋ sapátos,
kanyá sya y magmadalìʾ. Naŋ
màkúha nya aŋ súpot naŋ 10kwaltà ay
ipinaŋákù nya ŋ bábalik syà
agàd. Dátapwat, naŋ málayo sya, ay tináwag nya aŋ maŋa
nàtàtágù nya ŋ kapatìd, at
naŋ sila y maípon ay
nagyayá sya ŋ umuwèʾ. Dátapwat
isinagòt naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa kapatìd na
hindí nila nàlàláman aŋ daà
ŋ pauwèʾ.
Ŋúnit kanyà ŋ isinagòt na
tùtuntunìn nilà aŋ kanya ŋ 15inilaglàg na batò at tinápay sa
daàn.
|
He said further that he could not walk without shoes,
and therefore he should hurry. Taking the bag of money, the child
promised to return at once. However, when he had gone some distance, he
called his hidden brothers and sisters, and when they were assembled,
he suggested that they go home. But his brothers and sisters answered
that they did not know the way home. He however
answered that they should follow the stones and bread he had dropped on
the way.
|
|
Sinábi naŋ isà nyà ŋ
kapatìd na, kuŋ nàláman nya kuŋ
anò aŋ kanya ŋ
ginawàʾ sa tinápay, ay binigyàn sána
nya syà naŋ syà y
maŋhiŋìʾ. Kanilà ŋ
ikinaluŋkòt aŋ ipinakíta nila ŋ
karamútan sa kanila ŋ kapatìd.
|
One of his brothers said that, if he had known what he
had done with the bread, he would have given him some when he asked for
it. They were sorry for the stinginess they had shown toward their
brother.
|
|
20Hindí naláon at nàtagpuan
nilà aŋ hiléra naŋ maŋa batò sa
daàn. Itò y
tinuntòn nila at nakaratìŋ sila sa kanila ŋ
báhay, dalà nilà
aŋ súpot naŋ kwaltà na kanila ŋ
ibinigày pagdáka sa kanila ŋ magúlaŋ. Silà y
naŋatwá at naŋaluŋkòt dahilàn sa
kanilà ŋ malì
ŋ inásal sa maŋa anàk,—sila y
natwá sapagkàt máy-roon 25sila ŋ
ikabùbúhay sa maláo ŋ panahòn.
|
It was not long before they came upon the trail of
stones along their way. This they followed and arrived at their house,
bringing with them the bag of money, which they at once gave to their
parents. The latter rejoiced and were sorry for their bad conduct
toward their children,—they rejoiced because they had now the
means of living for a long time to come.
|
|
9. Isà ŋ pulìs na
nagaswàŋ-aswáŋan.
|
9. A policeman who played
vampire.
|
|
Noò ŋ
tagáraw naŋ taò ŋ
míle-nobisyèntos-dòs, hábaŋ aŋ
maŋa hinòg na
búŋa naŋ káhoy ay naŋakabiyábit sa
maŋa saŋà, lumagánap aŋ balíta sa boo ŋ
báyan naŋ San-Antónyo na máy-roo 30ŋ
aswàŋ na naglílibot sa báyan.
|
In the summer of the year 1902, when the ripe
fruits of the fruit-trees were hanging from the branches, there
circulated all through the town of San Antonio the rumor that a vampire
was going about the town.
|
|
Aŋ maŋa
táo-ŋ-San-Antónyo sa maŋa taò ŋ
iyòn ay may paniniwálaʾ sa maŋa núnoʾ,
aswàŋ, dwènde, at iba pà ŋ
katatakutàn. Karamíhan
sa kanilà y hindí nagkapálad na
makapagáral, dátapwat,
káhit na ganitò aŋ kalàgáyan nila,
sila y maŋa táwo 35ŋ mababaìt,
matahímik, at masisípag.
|
The people of San Antonio in those years believed in
ghosts, vampires, dwarves, and other objects of terror. Most of them
had not been fortunate enough to get an education, but, in spite of
this, they were kindly, quiet, and industrious people.
|
|
Aŋ maŋa
báhay sa báya ŋ itò ay maliliìt at
nayàyárì naŋ páwid at kawáyan. Máy-roon dì
ŋ ila ŋ báhay na tablà. Karamíhan ay nàtàtayò sa
malalakì ŋ bakúran, at aŋ dulúhan
naŋ bakúran ay
nàtàtamnàn naŋ maŋa
púno-ŋ-káhoy na masasaràp aŋ 40búŋa, gáya naŋ tsíko,
súhaʾ, santòl, mabúlo, maŋgà, at
iba pà.
|
The houses in this town were built of nipa-fibre and
bamboo. There were also some frame houses. Most of them stood in large
enclosures, and the rear part of these yards was planted with trees
that have tasty fruits, such as the custard-apple, grape-fruit, santol,
mabolo, mango, and the like.
|
|
Kasalukúya ŋ
nagkàkahinòg aŋ maŋa
búŋa-ŋ-káhuy na ytò naŋ lumagánap aŋ balíta na
may-roòn nà ŋ ila ŋ gabì na
nàmatáan naŋ ila
ŋ babáe aŋ aswàŋ sa ibà t iba
ŋ dulúhan. Aŋ maŋa báta at maŋa babáe ay siniglàn
naŋ malakì ŋ tákot, kanyá
pagkagàt 5naŋ dilìm ay agad-agàd silà
ŋ nagsipanahímik sa loòb naŋ báhay. Karamíhan naŋ maŋa
laláki ay naŋatákot dìn, dátapwat
máy-roo ŋ ila ŋ
nagsipagsábi na sila y hindí natàtákot,
sapagkàt hindí pa sila
nakátagpo naŋ aswàŋ, at sa ganitò y
hindí nila nàlàláman kuŋ dápat katakútan aŋ
aswàŋ.
|
These fruits were just getting ripe, when the rumor
spread that, for several nights back, some women had caught
sight of the vampire in various back yards. The women and children were
filled with great terror; accordingly, as soon as darkness came down,
they staid still in their houses. Most of the men also were afraid, but
there were some who said that they were not afraid, because they had
not yet come across a vampire and therefore did not know whether it was
really to be feared.
|
|
10Aŋ aswàŋ ay isa ŋ táo
ŋ malakì aŋ kapaŋyaríhan.
Nakapagìiba-t-ibà sya
naŋ paŋaŋatawàn. Kuŋ mínsan ay may
katawàn siya ŋ pára
ŋ táo, dátapwat maitèm, kuŋ
mínsan siya y isa ŋ malakì ŋ áso o báboy. Sya y
naŋàŋáin naŋ táo,
lálù nà naŋ maŋa bátaʾ. Dátapuwat aŋ
lálo ŋ mahalagà nya ŋ pagkáin at 15sya
rìn namàn nyà ŋ karanyúa ŋ
kinàkáin ay aŋ báta ŋ hindí pa
naipaŋáŋanàk
at násàsa tiyàn pa lámaŋ naŋ
kanya ŋ inà. Kanyá aŋ maŋa buntìs na babáye sa
báya ŋ yaòn ay lálo ŋ malakì
aŋ tákot. Hindí
nila pinatúlog aŋ kanila ŋ asáwa sa
pagbabantày sa kanila ŋ
tabì. Aŋ aswàŋ ay mahírap mápatay
naŋ patalìm o 20barìl, sapagkàt máy-roon sya
ŋ íisa lámaŋ na lugàr na dápat
màtamaàn o
masugátan úpaŋ sya y mápatày, at
aŋ lugàr na ytò ay
lihìm. Aŋ bágay lámaŋ na kanya ŋ
inìilágan ay aŋ báwaŋ. Kanyá itò y malakì ŋ
kagamitàn sa pagpapaláyas naŋ aswàŋ.
|
A vampire is a being of great power. It changes its body
into various forms. At some times it has a body like a human being, but
black, at others it is a large dog or pig. It eats people, especially
children. But its favorite food, by far, and that which it most
commonly eats, is the child yet unborn and still in its mother’s
womb. Therefore the pregnant women in the town had great fear. They did
not allow their husbands to sleep, for watching at their side. A
vampire is hard to kill with knife or gun, because it has but one place
which one must hit or wound in order to kill it, and this place is
secret. The only thing it flees from is garlic, which therefore is much
used in driving off vampires.
|
|
Dátapwat
isà ŋ bágay na nakapagtátakà sa
aswàŋ na iyòn ay 25aŋ kanyà ŋ
inugáli ŋ pagtitirà sa maŋa dulúhan
naŋ bakúran. Katakà-takà rìn aŋ bágay
na maŋa dalága aŋ karamíhan naŋ nagsipagsábi ŋ
nàmatáan nilà sa dulúhan sa itaàs
naŋ súhaʾ o iba pà ŋ púno-ŋ-káhoy aŋ
aswàŋ na iyòn. Ila ŋ táo ŋ
matalíno ay nagsábi
ŋ aŋ bintàŋ nilà y isa ŋ
magnanákaw at hindí aswàŋ aŋ 30pinagkàkatakutà ŋ
iyòn.
|
A surprising thing, however, about this vampire was its
habit of keeping itself in back yards. Strange was also the fact that
it was mostly young girls who said that they had caught sight of this
vampire in back yards, up in grape-fruit trees and other trees. A few
bold men said that they suspected that this spook was a thief and no
vampire.
|
|
Isa ŋ polìs
na may hindí karanyúa ŋ tápaŋ ay siya
ŋ tumiktìk sa
aswàŋ na itò sa dulúha ŋ bágo
ŋ kinakitáan sa kanyà. Pagdilìm ay nároon na syà sa kanya
ŋ kublíhan. Hindí nalaúnan at dumatìŋ aŋ aswàŋ,
umakyàt sa isa púno-ŋ-súhaʾ, at
nárinig niya 35ŋ pumitàs naŋ marámi ŋ
búŋa. Itò y bumábaʾ at umalìs,
dátapwat sya y sinundàn
naŋ pulìs haŋgàŋ sa báhay na kanya
ŋ pinasúkan.
|
It was a certain policeman of more than usual courage
who spied upon this vampire in a back yard in which it had recently
been seen. When darkness came, he went to his hiding-place. It was not
long before the vampire came and climbed on a grape-fruit tree, and he
heard it picking many fruits. It came down and went away, but was
followed by the policeman to a house which it entered.
|
|
Malakì aŋ
nagìŋ pagkàgúlat naŋ polìs,
naŋ díto nàmálas nya ŋ aŋ kápwa nya polìs
nabàbálot naŋ maitìm na kúmot, at
aŋ 40súpot na itìm na punò naŋ
súhaʾ ay kasalukúyan pa lámaŋ niya
ŋ inilálapàg.
|
Great was the surprise of the policeman, when he saw
here his fellow policeman wrapped up in a black sheet and just putting
down on the floor a black bag full of grape-fruit.
|
|
Niyáyà
nya sa munisípyo aŋ kápwa nya polìs, at
doòn kinàbukásan ipinagsumbòŋ nyà sa presidènte.
Aŋ polìs na nagaswaŋ-aswáŋan ay nábilaŋgò dahilàn sa
sála ŋ pagnanákaw.
|
He summoned his fellow policeman to the town hall and
there on the next day accused him before the judge. The policeman who
had played vampire was put in jail for the crime of theft.
|
|
10. Isà ŋ aswàŋ na
nápatày.
|
10. A vampire that got
killed.
|
|
Isà ŋ
gabì sa isà ŋ báhay na
pàŋaserahàn naŋ ilà ŋ maŋa
5nagsìsipagáral sa
báya-ŋ-Malólos ay nárinig ko ŋ
isinalaysày naŋ isà
ŋ matandàʾ na may gúlaŋ na siyàm na
pù ŋ taòn sa isà ŋ umpúkan aŋ sumúsunòd.
|
One evening in a students’ boarding-house in
the town of Malolos I heard an old man, ninety years of age, tell a
company the following story:
|
|
Noò ŋ sya y
bágo ŋ táwu pa lámaŋ ay sa búkid
sya nagtítirà. Íilan lámaŋ silà ŋ
magkakápit-báhay. Isa ŋ áraw ay
namatayàn 10aŋ isa nyà ŋ
kápit-báhay. Sa pagsunòd sa isa ŋ
matandà ŋ kaugaliàn ay dumalo syà sa kápit-báhay na may
hápis.
|
When he was still a young unmarried man, he lived in the
country. There were only a very few neighbors. One day there was a
death in the house of a neighbor. Following an ancient custom, he went
to the house of mourning.
|
|
Naŋ
dumatìŋ sya doòn ay hindí nalaúnan at
nàbalitáan nyà na
may aswàŋ sa kanila ŋ lugàr. Syà ay may
malakì at katutúbo ŋ gálit sa maŋa aswàŋ,
kaniyá inakálà nya ŋ magbantày
naŋ gabì 15ŋ
iyòn.
|
When he arrived there it was not long before he was told
that there was a vampire in the place. He had a great and inherited
hatred of vampires and therefore decided to watch that night.
|
|
Naŋ malálim
nà aŋ gabì ay nanáog sya sa báhay at
sa isa ŋ karitò ŋ
dí maláyo sa báhay, doòn sya
nahigàʾ. Kabilúgan naŋ bwàn naŋ gabi ŋ iyòn, kanyà
malínaw aŋ pagkàkíta nya sa maŋa bágay sa palìgid-lígid.
Walá sya ŋ nàmálas na
màpaghìhinaláa 20ŋ isa ŋ
aswàŋ, kanyá sya y natúlog.
|
Late in the evening he left the house and in a wagon not
far from the house, there he lay down. There was a full moon that
night, so that he had a clear view of things round about. As he saw
nothing that could be suspected of being a vampire, he went to
sleep.
|
|
Kinàháti-ŋ-gabihàn ay
nágisiŋ syà at aŋ úna ŋ
tinamaàn naŋ kanyà
ŋ maŋa matà ay isà ŋ bágay na
maitìm sa bubuŋàn naŋ báhay naŋ kinamatayàn. Aŋ
maitìm na iyòn ay walá roon bágo sya natúlog, kaniyá
nagbintaŋ syà na iyòn ay aŋ aswàŋ
na nàbalitáan 25nyà. Aŋ
aswàŋ ay naŋàŋáin naŋ
patày na táo, kanyà sinapantáhà
nya na aŋ patày aŋ
sadyá doòn naŋ aswàŋ na iyòn.
|
At midnight he woke up, and the first thing that struck
his eyes was a black object on the roof of the house where there had
been a death. This black thing had not been there before he went to
sleep, so he suspected that this was the vampire he had been told
about. Vampires eat dead people, so he concluded that the dead person
was the thing for which the vampire had come there.
|
|
Pumanhìk sya sa
báhay at dalà nyà aŋ isa ŋ gúlok.
Aŋ maŋa táo y
natùtúlog. Sa itaàs ay may-roon syà ŋ
nàkíta ŋ isa ŋ bágay na nakalawìt mulá sa
bubuŋàn naŋ báhay. Itò y gáya
naŋ 30bitúka naŋ manòk.
Humábà naŋ humábaʾ,
haŋgàŋ sa aŋ dúlo y pumások sa bibìg naŋ patày.
Aŋ patày ay nagtindìg sa kanyà ŋ kinàlàlagyàn
pagkapások sa kanya ŋ bibìg naŋ bágay na
iyòn.
|
Carrying a bolo-knife, he went up to the house. The
people were asleep. Up above he saw something hanging down from the
roof of the house. It was like the intestine of a chicken. It got
longer and longer, until the end of it went into the mouth of the dead
person. The corpse stood up from the place where it lay, when this
thing went into its mouth.
|
|
Aŋ ginawá
naŋ bágo ŋ táo ay lumápit siya sa
nakatindìg na patày at
sa pamamagítan naŋ dala nyà ŋ gúlok ay
pinútol niya 35aŋ bágay na iyòn na pára
ŋ bitúka naŋ manòk. Naŋ itò y
mapútol ay may kumalabòg sa tabì naŋ
báhay. Nanáog siya at doòn ay nàkíta
nya aŋ patày na aswàŋ.
|
What the young man did was to walk up to the upright
corpse and, with the bolo he was carrying, cut the thing that was like
the intestine of a chicken. When he had cut this, something came down
with a thud at the side of the house. He went down, and there he saw
the dead vampire.
|
|
11. Aŋ maŋkukúlam.
|
11. Sorcerers.
|
|
Sa ilà
ŋ poòk sa Filipínas ay may lubòs na
paniniwálà sa maŋkukúlam aŋ maŋa táo. Áyon sa kanila ŋ
paniwálaʾ aŋ maŋkukúlam ay isa ŋ táo ŋ may malakì
ŋ kapaŋyaríhan at aŋ kapaŋyaríha
ŋ 5itò y gáliŋ sa dimóniyo o
kayà y mána sa magúlaŋ. Bágo
màkamtàn aŋ
kapaŋyaríha ŋ iyòn aŋ isà ay
dápat múna ŋ makipagkayibígan
at magsilbè sa dimóniyo.
Dátapwat may ilan dì ŋ nanìniwála
ŋ nàpùpúlot o
naàágaw aŋ kapaŋyaríha ŋ
iyòn sa gúbat o ilàŋ na lugàr na mahírap
puntahàn at karanyúwa y pinagkàkatakutàn.
10
|
In some places in the Philippines the people have
a firm belief in sorcerers. According to their belief a sorcerer is a
person of great power, and this power comes from a demon or else is
inherited from one’s parents. Before one may gain this power one
must first become friends with a demon and serve it. However, there are
some also who believe that one may find or snatch up this power in a
jungle or some uncanny place that is hard to reach and usually full of
terror.
|
|
Aŋ kúlam ay
siyà ŋ naàágaw,
nàmàmána, o ibiníbigay naŋ
dimóniyo, at iyò y sya ŋ
pinaŋgàgalíŋan naŋ
kapaŋyaríhan naŋ nagmème-áreʾ. Aŋ hitsúra
naŋ kúlam ay hindí parè-parého.
Kuŋ mìnsan ay isa ŋ
batò o isa ŋ maníka ŋ maliìt at
masamàʾ aŋ 15hitsúra. Kuŋ
madilìm aŋ kúlam na itò y
nagníniŋnìŋ na pára ŋ
alitaptàp, dátapwat
aŋ niŋnìŋ na itò y nawáwalà
namàn pag inìbig naŋ kúlam. Aŋ kúlam at aŋ táo,
káhit laláki o babáe, na nagàári sa
kanyà ay hindí
naghíhiwalày káhit isà ŋ
sandalèʾ at káhit na sa pagpalígoʾ
ay dinádala naŋ
maŋkukúlam aŋ kanya ŋ kúlam. Dáhil
díto aŋ 20maŋa táo ŋ mapagsyásat, pag
íbig nilà ŋ màpagkilála kuŋ
maŋkukúlam ŋàʾ o hindìʾ aŋ isa
ŋ táo ŋ kanila ŋ pinaghìhinaláan,
ay sinùsubúkan nila
itò sa kanyà ŋ pagpalígoʾ. Kuŋ
hindí maíŋat at
walà ŋ hinálà aŋ maŋkukúlam
na syà y sinùsubúkan, kuŋ mínsan ay nagkàkapálad aŋ
nanùnúbok na màkíta nya aŋ
kúlam.
|
The kulam is that seized, inherited, or given by
the demon, and it is the source of the possessor’s power. The
appearance of the kulam is not always the same. Sometimes it is
a stone or a small doll of ugly appearance. In the dark this
kulam glows like a firefly, but this glow disappears when the
kulam desires it. The kulam and the person, man or woman,
who possesses it, do not separate even for a moment, and even when
bathing the sorcerer carries his kulam. Therefore, curious
people, when they wish to find out whether a person whom they suspect
is really a sorcerer or not, watch him at his bath. If the sorcerer is
not careful and has no suspicion that he is being watched, the watcher
sometimes succeeds in seeing the kulam.
|
|
25Aŋ maŋkukúlam ay may
kapaŋyaríhan dì ŋ itágoʾ sa
loòb naŋ kanyà
ŋ katawàn aŋ kúlam, at hindi
bihíraʾ aŋ maŋa táo ŋ nakàkíta naŋ
maŋkukúlam sa kanya ŋ pagkamatày. Sa
kàhulì-hulíha ŋ sandalìʾ, bágo malagòt
aŋ hiniŋà, inilúluwa nilà aŋ
kúlam.
|
The sorcerer has also the power of concealing the
kulam inside his body, and the people are not rare who have seen
a sorcerer at his death. At the last moment, before breathing ceases,
he spits out the kulam.
|
|
30Itò y naŋyàyári
lámaŋ kuŋ áyaw ipamána naŋ
maŋkukúlam aŋ
kanyà ŋ kúlam. Kuŋ ipinamàmána
namàn itò, malwat pà bágo mamatày aŋ maŋkukúlam
ay tinàtáwag na nyà aŋ kanyà ŋ
íbig pamanáhan, at
díto y líhim na líhim nya ŋ ibiníbigay
aŋ kúlam.
|
This happens only when the sorcerer does not wish to
bequeath his kulam. If, however, he wishes to bequeath it, then,
long before the sorcerer dies, he calls the person to whom he wishes to
bequeath it and in all secrecy gives him the kulam.
|
|
35Aŋ malakì ŋ
kapaŋyaríhan naŋ maŋkukúlam ay
ginàgámit nya
lában sa kanya ŋ maŋa kaáway, sa maŋa
táo ŋ kanyà ŋ kinagàgalítan, o
kayà y sa maŋa háyop nilà, kuŋ siya
nyà ŋ íbig paŋhigantihàn. Gayon dìn
ginàgámit nya aŋ kanya ŋ
kapaŋyaríhan sa
paŋbibíroʾ sa
isa ŋ táo o háyop na kanya ŋ
màkatwaàn.
|
The great power of the sorcerer is used by him against
his enemies, against people who have incurred his anger; or against
their live stock, in case he wishes to make this latter the object of
his vengeance. He also uses his power in playing jokes on a person or
animal that has gained his liking.
|
|
40Aŋ kanyà ŋ
pinasàsakítan kadalasà y nagáanyo ŋ
pára ŋ ulòl. Kuŋ mínsan aŋ kanya ŋ
kinùkúlam ay dumádaiŋ na masakìt
aŋ kanya ŋ buò ŋ
katawàn, nagsísisigàw, at hindí
màtahímik káhit isà ŋ sandalèʾ. Sa háyop
namàn karanyúwa y aŋ bábuy na
pinakamahalagà sa may
áriʾ, aŋ kanya ŋ ibiníbigay na
parúsa ay gáya naŋ
sakìt na kólera, dátapuwat lálu ŋ
mabagsìk káy sa ríto. Aŋ pagdumì naŋ háyop ay wala ŋ
patìd, at pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ
óras, 5káhit na gáno katabàʾ
aŋ háyop, ay nagígiŋ butò t
balàt. Aŋ táo ŋ
nàkùkúlam nya ay malakàs kumáin,
katimbàŋ naŋ
dalawà katáo, at
mapaŋhilìŋ naŋ masasaràp na
pagkáin. Dáhil díto aŋ paniwála naŋ maŋa táo y kasálo
ŋ kumàkáin naŋ máy sakit aŋ
maŋkukúlam na
nagpàparúsa sa kanyà.
|
His victim usually acts like crazy. Sometimes the person
he has bewitched complains that his whole body is sore, keeps shouting,
and cannot keep quiet even for a moment. In the case of
animals,—usually the pig most valued by the owner,—the
punishment he gives is like the disease of cholera, but more severe
than this. The bowel-movement of the animal does not stop, and after a
few hours, no matter how fat the animal, it becomes skin and bone. The
bewitched person eats mightily, like two men, and keeps asking for
tasty food. Therefore people believe that the sorcerer who is punishing
him shares in the eating of the sick person.
|
|
10Aŋ maŋkukúlam ay may
kapaŋyaríha ŋ pumaloòb sa katawàn
naŋ kanyà ŋ kinùkúlam. Itò y sya
ŋ paniwálaʾ, dátapuwat kuŋ papáno aŋ paraàn naŋ
pagpások naŋ maŋkukúlam at kuŋ saàn
sya pumàpások sa
katawàn naŋ kanya ŋ kinùkúlam ay
walà ŋ nakààalàm. Ŋúnit aŋ
kanya ŋ nilàlabasàn ay aŋ
hintutúroʾ. Aŋ 15bágay na itò
ay malakì ŋ kabuluhàn úkol sa paggamòt
sa nàkùkúlam at
gayon dìn sa pagpaparúsa sa maŋkukúlam.
|
The sorcerer has the power of entering the body of the
person bewitched. This is the belief, but in what way the sorcerer
effects his entrance or at what point he enters the body of the person
he is bewitching, there is no one who knows. However the place where he
comes out is the forefinger. This fact is of great importance for the
cure of people who have been bewitched and also for the punishment of
sorcerers.
|
|
Káhit na malakì aŋ
kapaŋyaríhan naŋ maŋkukúlam ay mayroon
dìn sya ŋ
kinatàtakútan, karanyúwa y aŋ maŋa
táo ŋ malalakàs, matápaŋ, at wala ŋ paniwálà
sa kapaŋyaríhan naŋ maŋkukúlam
20at iba pà ŋ
pinagkàkatakutàn naŋ maŋa iba ŋ
táo. Dáhil díto y
hindí bihíraʾ na aŋ isà ŋ
táo y pamagatà ŋ
“médiko-ŋ-maŋkukúlam” pagkaraàn naŋ úna o
ikalawà nya ŋ pagpapagalìŋ naŋ táo
sa sakìt na itò.
|
Although the power of the sorcerer is great, yet there
are some things which he fears, usually strong people who are bold and
have no faith in the powers of sorcerers and other things that terrify
other people. Therefore it is not rare that, after the first or second
time he cures a person of this disease, some man receives the title of
“witch-doctor.”
|
|
Mínsan ay
nárinig ko ŋ magbalítaʾ aŋ isa ŋ
táo ŋ nakàkíta 25naŋ
paŋgagamòt naŋ táo ŋ
nàkùkúlam. Aŋ táo ŋ itò y
may isa ŋ kápit-báhay
na may anàk na dalága. Sa dalága ŋ itò
y marámi ŋ
maŋlilígaw, at aŋ isà sa kanilà y
pinaghìhinaláa ŋ maŋkukúlam. Sa kasamaà-ŋ-pálad
nitò ay nagìŋ isa syà sa maŋa
hindí nátaŋgàp. Sa malakì nya ŋ gálit ay
magkasunòd nya ŋ kinúlam aŋ babáye
30at
laláki ŋ magkaìbígan.
|
I once heard someone who had seen the cure of a
bewitched person tell the story. The narrator had a neighbor who had a
young daughter. This young lady had many suitors, and one of them was
suspected of being a sorcerer. He had the bad fortune to be one of
those who were not accepted. In his great anger he bewitched, one after
the other, the betrothed man and woman.
|
|
Inúna nya
aŋ babáye at ito namà y agàd na
itináwag naŋ médiko-ŋ-maŋkukúlam
naŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ. Naŋ
dumatìŋ aŋ médiko at nàkíta nya
aŋ máy sakìt, ay sinábi nya ŋ
nàkùkúlam ŋàʾ aŋ
babáye.
|
He began with the woman, and her parents at once called
in a witch-doctor for her. When the doctor arrived and saw the patient,
he said that the woman was really bewitched.
|
|
35Sinábi nya sa maŋa táo
doòn na hwàg paàaláman sa
nàkùkúlam na
syà y nàròroòn sa báhay. Pag
itò y nàláman naŋ máy sakìt, ay màlàláman
dìn naŋ maŋkukúlam na nása loòb
naŋ kanya ŋ katawàn,
at makaáalis agàd aŋ maŋkukúlam. Aŋ
médiko y lumápit na
hindí nàmaláyan naŋ babáye, at
pagdáka y tinaŋnan 40nyà naŋ
mahigpìt aŋ dalawà ŋ hintutúroʾ
naŋ babáye. Itò y lálo ŋ inilakàs aŋ
pagsigàw, at kuminìg na pára ŋ isa ŋ
natàtákot.
|
He told the people who were there not to let the
bewitched person know that he was in the house. If the patient knew
this, the sorcerer who was inside her body would have a chance to go
away at once. The doctor went up to the woman without her being aware
of it and suddenly seized her two forefingers in a tight grip. She
shouted all the louder and trembled like one in terror.
|
|
Aŋ maŋkukúlam, áyon sa
paniwálà naŋ maŋa táo, ay sya ŋ
nakàràramdàm
naŋ ano mà ŋ pasákit na ibigày sa
katawàn naŋ kanyà ŋ kinùkúlam
hábaŋ sya y násàsa loòb naŋ
katawàn nitò. Gayon
dìn, kuŋ kausápin aŋ máy sakìt,
ay siyà aŋ sumásagòt.
|
The sorcerer, according to people’s belief, feels
any pain that is given to the body of the person he is bewitching while
he is within the latter’s body. Likewise, when one speaks with
the patient, it is he who answers.
|
|
Dáhil díto y itinanòŋ
pagdáka naŋ médiko: “Anò aŋ
ginágawá mo ríto,
salbáhe?”
|
Therefore the doctor suddenly asked: “What are you
doing here, you brute?”
|
|
5Aŋ máy sakit ay hindí
kumibòʾ, dátapwat nagpílit na magkawalàʾ. Aŋ ipinakíta nya
ŋ lakàs ay hindí karanyúwa ŋ
lakàs naŋ babáye.
|
The patient did not utter a word, but tried to get free.
The strength she displayed was not the usual strength of a woman.
|
|
Dátapuwat
hindí sya pinawalàn naŋ médiko, at itò
y tumanòŋ na
mulìʾ: “Anò aŋ ginágawá mo
ríto? Bákit ka naparíto? 10Pag hindí ka
sumagòt, ay pahìhirápan kità.”
|
But the doctor did not let her go, and asked her again:
“What are you doing here? Why have you come here? If you do not
answer, I shall torture you.”
|
|
Aŋ babáye
ay nagmàmakaáwa ŋ sumagòt: “Walá
poʾ, hindí na poʾ
úulèʾ, pawalan pòʾ ninyo akò, at
akò y nahìhirápan nà.”
|
The woman answered in a pitiful tone: “No, sir, I
shan’t do it again; let me go, sir; you are torturing me
already.”
|
|
“Pawalàn
kità?” itinanòŋ agàd naŋ
médiko, “Maŋákù ka múna sa
ákin na hindí ka na bábalik.”
|
“Shall I let you go?” asked the doctor at
once. “Promise me first that you won’t come back.”
|
|
15“Hindí na pòʾ akò
bábalik,” aŋ sagòt naŋ babáye.
|
“No, I shan’t come back, sir,”
answered the woman.
|
|
“Pag
nàhúle kità ulèʾ díto, ay
pàpatayìn kità. Hwag kà ŋ salbáhe. Tumahímik ka sa
iyò ŋ báhay.”
|
“If I catch you here again, I shall kill you.
Don’t be troublesome. Stay still in your house.”
|
|
“Ó
poʾ, ó poʾ, hindí na pòʾ akò
bábalik. Pawalàn na pò ninyo
akò!”
|
“Yes, sir; yes, sir; I shan’t come back,
sir. Please, let me go!”
|
|
20Hábaŋ aŋ sàlitáa
ŋ itò y naŋyàyári aŋ babáye
ay nagpìpílit na
magkawalàʾ, íbig nya ŋ mabitíwan
naŋ médiko aŋ kanya ŋ hintutúroʾ. Pagkapaŋáko naŋ
babáye ay binitíwan naŋ médiko aŋ dalawà nya ŋ
hintutúroʾ. Aŋ mukhá naŋ babáye na
dáti ay nagpàpakilála naŋ malakì ŋ
paghihírap ŋayò y nàhúsay, at sya y
25pára ŋ gága na
pinagsa-ulàn naŋ pagiísip. Sya ay tumahímik,
pinútol aŋ
pagsisigàw, at nàkaúsap naŋ
matwìd.
|
While this dialogue was taking place, the woman was
struggling to get loose and trying to make the doctor let go of her
forefingers. When the woman had made her promise, the doctor let go of
her two forefingers. The face of the woman, which just before had been
expressing great suffering, now became quiet, and she was like a
madwoman who has got back her reason. She became quiet, stopped
shouting, and was able to converse intelligently.
|
|
Aŋ laláki
namàn ay nàtìtirà sa isa ŋ báya
ŋ malápit. Naŋ sya y
kinùkúlam nà ay itináwag sya naŋ
maŋgagámot naŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd na laláke. Sa kalakhàn
naŋ gálit naŋ kapatìd na ytò 30ay sya
nyà ŋ tináwag aŋ maŋgagamòt na
mabagsìk at malupìt sa pagtaráto nya sa maŋà
maŋkukúlam.
|
The man lived in a near-by town. When he was bewitched
his brother called a physician for him. In his extreme anger, this
brother called a physician who was fierce and cruel in his treatment of
sorcerers.
|
|
Líhim na dumatìŋ aŋ
maŋgagámot sa báhay naŋ máy
sakìt. Mulá sa kanya
ŋ kublíhan ay piního múna nya kuŋ
aŋ maŋkukúlam ay
násàsa katawàn ŋàʾ naŋ
máy sakìt. Itò y
nàpagkìkilála 35sa pagsisigàw,
pagkílos, at pananalità ŋ hindí
tulà-tulàʾ naŋ
máy sakìt. Aŋ maŋgagamòt ay
nagpatalìm naŋ isà ŋ gúlok at pagkatápos ay maligsì sya
ŋ tumakbò sa tabì naŋ máy sakìt. Tinaŋnan nyà aŋ
dalawà ŋ hintutúro nitò, dinaganàn
nya aŋ katawàn, at
tinagá nya ŋ makáilan aŋ mukhá naŋ
máy 40sakìt. Itò y nagsisigàw
at nagkawalàʾ, dátapwat naŋ makawalá sya
y may maŋa súgat na aŋ kanyà ŋ
mukhàʾ at aŋ dugò y umàágos na wala ŋ patìd.
Walà ŋ kibú sya iníwan naŋ
maŋgagamòt. Hinánap nitò aŋ
kapatìd naŋ sugatàn at kanya ŋ sinábi
na hwag
pansinìn aŋ maŋa súgat naŋ kanya ŋ
kapatìd, at kinàbukása y mawáwalaʾ iyòn at
màlìlípat sa maŋkukúlam,
sapagkàt dinatnàn nya
itò sa katawàn naŋ kanyà ŋ
kapatìd. Kinàbukásan ay pinarunàn naŋ médiko aŋ kanya
ŋ ginamòt naŋ patalìm, at 5malakì aŋ
tuwá nya naŋ itò y màkíta nya ŋ
mahúsay at wala ŋ bakas-súgat sa mukhàʾ. Pagkaraàn
naŋ ila ŋ áraw nàbalitáan nilà na isa ŋ maŋkukúlam sa
kápit-báyan nilà ay malubhàʾ aŋ
lagày dahilàn sa
pagdudugò ŋ hindí maampàt naŋ maŋa
súgat nya sa mukhàʾ.
|
The physician came secretly to the sick man’s
house. From his hiding-place he first determined at what time the
sorcerer was in the body of the sick man. This showed itself in the
shouting, movements, and senseless talking of the patient. The
physician sharpened a bolo-knife and, when he had done this, quickly
ran to the side of the patient. He then seized the latter’s two
forefingers, leaned over his body, and cut several deep gashes in his
face. The patient screamed and tried to get away, but when he did get
away there were wounds in his face and the blood was flowing in a
stream. The physician left him without a word. He sought out the
brother of the wounded man and told him not to heed his brother’s
wounds, for tomorrow they would go away and be transferred to the
sorcerer, for it was the latter whom he had reached in the body of his
brother. On the next day the doctor went to the man whom he had cured
with the knife and was much pleased when he found him well and without
the marks of wounds in his face. A few days later they heard that a
sorcerer in the neighboring town was in a serious condition, owing to
the unceasing flow of blood from some wounds in his face.
|
|
10Máy-roon
dìn namà ŋ maŋkukúlam na maligsì
at hindí na paaábot sa
maŋgagamòt. Aŋ maŋgagamòt namàn ay
kinàkayiláŋa ŋ
bihásaʾ at maligsì. Aŋ káhit síno
y maàári ŋ gumamòt sa isà ŋ
nàkùkúlam, yámaŋ walá
namà ŋ ibà ŋ paŋgamòt kuŋ hindìʾ aŋ
pagpapahìrap sa katawàn naŋ
nàkùkúlam. 15Dátapuwat
malakì aŋ paŋánib, sapagkàt, kuŋ
hindí maligsì, dahilàn sa kawalàn naŋ sánay,
aŋ gumágamòt, maàári ŋ makawalàʾ aŋ
maŋkukúlam. Kuŋ magkágayo y aŋ
nàkùkúlam mìsmo aŋ maghìhírap
dahilàn sa parúsa. Mínsan ay máy
nàbalíta ŋ
naŋyári na gáya nitò ŋ
sumúsunòd.
|
There are also, however, some sorcerers who are quick
and have not been caught by physicians. The physician, too, must be
skilful and quick. Anyone at all can cure a person who has been
bewitched, since there is no other method of cure than that of
inflicting pain on the body of the bewitched person. The danger,
however, is great, since, if the one who is attempting the cure is not
quick, owing to lack of practice, the sorcerer will be able to get
away. In this event it is the bewitched person himself who will suffer
from the punishment. It is related that there once happened something
like this which follows.
|
|
20Aŋ isà sa dalawà ŋ
magkapatìd na laláki ay kinúlam naŋ kanya ŋ karibàl sa
paglígaw. Walà ŋ màtáwag na
médiko-ŋ-maŋkukúlam. Sa malakì ŋ áwà sa kanyà
naŋ kanya ŋ kúya ay tinalagà nitò ŋ gamutìn sya
káhit na walá sya ŋ pagkasánay. Hindí ŋá sya
sanày, dátapwat madalàs nya ŋ
nàpakiŋgàn sa 25maŋa maŋgagamòt aŋ
paraàn naŋ paggamòt. Isa ŋ hápon,
naŋ inakálà nya ŋ nása loòb na
namàn naŋ katawàn naŋ kanyà ŋ
kapatìd aŋ
maŋkukúlam, ay sinuŋgabàn nya agàd
aŋ isa ŋ gúlok at
pagkálapit nyà sa kanya ŋ kapatìd ay
tinagá nya itò naŋ walà ŋ tuòs. Kinàbukásan sa
lugàr naŋ màkíta nya ŋ
magalìŋ at wala 30ŋ súgat aŋ
kanyà ŋ kapatìd itò y baŋkày na
lámaŋ. Aŋ maŋkukúlam ay nakawalàʾ.
|
One of two brothers was bewitched by his rival in
courtship. There was no witch-doctor within call. In his great pity
for him, the older brother decided to cure him, even though he had had
no practice. He was not practised, to be sure, but he had often heard
from physicians the manner of cure. One evening, when he thought that
the sorcerer was inside his brother’s body, he quickly seized a
bolo, and, stepping up to his brother, cut him without care. On the
next day, instead of his finding his brother well and unwounded, the
latter was a corpse. The sorcerer had got away.
|
|
12. Aŋ laro ŋ sípaʾ sa
Filipínas.
|
12. The game of football
in the Philippines.
|
|
Aŋ laro
ŋ sípà sa Estádos-Unídos at sa
Filipínas ay lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ pagkakáibà. Sa
lugàr naŋ dalawà ŋ paŋkàt na
nagtàtálo 35aŋ nagsìsipaglaròʾ na
gáya naŋ fùtbol, sa sípà ay isà
ŋ paŋkàt lámaŋ aŋ naglálaròʾ.
Sa sípà aŋ haŋàd naŋ
nagsìsipaglarò ay hindí aŋ talúnin aŋ isa ŋ
kaáway, dátapuwat aŋ huwàg bayáa
ŋ lumagpàk sa
lúpà aŋ bóla o sípaʾ.
Aŋ bóla
ŋ gámit ay malakì ŋ malaki rìn aŋ
kaibhàn. Itò y 40nayàyárì naŋ yantòk
na tinilàd at nilála ŋ pabilòg. Walà
ŋ lamàn
aŋ loòb, at aŋ maŋa matà naŋ
sulihiyà ay malalakè. Dáhil díto ay magaàn aŋ sípaʾ,
hindí gáya naŋ bòla ŋ gámit sa
bèsbol.
|
The games of football in the United States and in
the Philippines are very different. Instead of the players belonging to
two contending sides, as in American football, in
“sipa” the players form but one party. In
sipa the aim of the players is not to defeat an opponent, but to
prevent the ball or sipa from falling to the ground. The ball
used is also very different. It is made of split rattan woven into the
shape of a sphere. The inside is hollow and the eyes of the weave are
large. Therefore the sipa, unlike the ball used in baseball, is
light.
|
|
Mulá sa dalawà haŋgàŋ sa
dalawà ŋ pùʾ aŋ bílaŋ naŋ
nagsìsipaglaròʾ. Kuŋ silà ay marámi aŋ áyos
ay pabilòg. Úpaŋ umpisahàn 5aŋ
paglalaròʾ isà sa maŋa kasále ay
ihiníhitsà aŋ sípa na paitaàs at patúŋo sa isà sa
maŋa nagsìsipaglaròʾ, karanyúwa y sa
isà ŋ katapàt
nyà. Aŋ táo ŋ hinitsahàn naŋ
sípaʾ ay ipinabábalik itò sa naghágis sa kanyà, hindí
naŋ kanya ŋ kamày, dátapwat naŋ kanya
ŋ paà.
|
The number of players is from two to twenty. When they
are many, they stand in a circle. To begin the game, one of the party
throws the sipa ball up into the air and toward one of the
players, usually toward one opposite him. The one to whom the ball is
tossed returns it to the one who threw it to him, not with his hand,
but with his foot.
|
|
10Kuŋ aŋ maŋa
nagsìsipaglarò ay marurúnoŋ,
napapúpunta nilà aŋ
pelóta sa káhit na síno sa maŋa
kasále, kayà t báwat isà sa kanilà ay nakaabàŋ at
naghíhintay naŋ pagdatìŋ naŋ
sípaʾ. Aŋ
báwat isà ay nagìíŋat na hwàg
bayáa ŋ lumagpàk sa lúpa aŋ pelóta. Kadalasàn aŋ
maŋa nagsísipaglarò ay nagpàpakíta
naŋ 15sarì-sári ŋ áyus naŋ
pagsípaʾ. Aŋ maŋa magandà ŋ
pagbabaluktòt naŋ
paà sa harapàn o likuràn, aŋ maligsì
at magaà ŋ lundàg, aŋ banáyad at magaà ŋ
pagsípà sa pelóta, at aŋ pagpapadalà
naŋ sípà sa
káhit na alì ŋ bandà ay maŋa
bágay na nagpàpagandà sa laro ŋ sípaʾ. Hindi rìn
bihíra na aŋ balíkat, aŋ síko, aŋ
túhod, o 20aŋ kamày ay sya ŋ
ginàgámit sa pagpapabalìk naŋ
pelóta.
|
When the players are skilful, they direct the ball to
each one of the party, so that each one of them is alert and ready for
the coming of the ball. Each one is careful not to let the ball fall to
the ground. Often the players display various manners of sending the
ball. The graceful bendings of the legs forward and backward, the quick
and light leaps, the gentle and light kicking of the ball, and the
sending of the ball in every possible direction, are features which
give beauty to the game of sipa. Sometimes the shoulder, the
elbow, the knee, or the hand is used in returning the ball.
|
|
Papáno aŋ
pagkakatalò sa larò ŋ itò? Itò y
maàári lámaŋ sa pagpapàtagálan naŋ hindí
paglagpàk naŋ sípà sa lúpaʾ.
|
How is there any contest in this game? This can consist
only in the test of endurance in keeping the ball from falling to the
ground.
|
|
Kuŋ
halimbáwa y íbig makipaglában naŋ isa ŋ
paŋkàt naŋ maŋa
màninípa o sipéros sa ybà ŋ
paŋkàt, aŋ úna y maŋhàhámon
25sa alin
mà ŋ paŋkàt na kanila ŋ
màpíleʾ. Kuŋ itò y taŋgapìn,
aŋ áraw, óras, at
lugàr naŋ paglalarò ay agad nà ŋ
nàbàbalíta sa maŋa pàhayagàn.
|
When, for instance, one team of football-players or
siperos wants to contend with another team, the former
challenges whatever team it has picked out. If the challenge is
accepted, the day, hour, and place of the game are at once announced in
the newspapers.
|
|
Sa óras naŋ
paglalaròʾ ay hindí íilan lámaŋ
na líbo ŋ táo aŋ nagsísipanoòd. Aŋ
maŋhahámun karanyúwa y umùúpa naŋ
30isa
ŋ bànda-ŋ-músika at tinùtugtugàn
aŋ báwat paŋkàt sa kanilà ŋ paglalaròʾ. Karanyúwa y
dalawà ŋ bànda aŋ músika,
sapagkàt, kuŋ aŋ
hinámon ay may kauntì ŋ gílas, ay íbig
dìn namàn nilà ŋ ipakíta, at dáhil díto y
nagdádala silà naŋ saríle nilà ŋ
bànda naŋ músika.
|
At the time of the game thousands of people look on. The
challenging party usually hires a band of musicians, and each team is
played for during its innings. Usually there are two bands, for, if the
challenged party has any pride, it wants to show it and so brings its
own band.
|
|
35Pagkaraàn naŋ laròʾ aŋ
hukòm ay syà ŋ nagpàpaháyag sa maŋa nanúnoòd kuŋ
alì ŋ paŋkàt aŋ nanálo.
Pagkárinig nilà naŋ paháyag naŋ hukòm ay agad-agàd
inùumpisahàn aŋ pagisìgáwan at maŋa pagpúri sa nanálo
ŋ paŋkàt. Aŋ mànanalò ŋ
paŋkàt at aŋ kanila
ŋ maŋa kaybígan magkakasáma ŋ
tinùtugtugàn naŋ 40kanila ŋ bànda
naŋ músika ay agàd-agàd na
nagpàpaséyo sa maŋa
lugàr na malápit sa kanilà ŋ
pinaglaruàn. Kinàbukásan aŋ lahàt
naŋ naŋyári ay nàkìkíta sa
maŋa pàhayagàn.
|
After the game the judge announces to the spectators
which team has won. When the announcement of the judge has been heard,
there begins at once the yelling and the honoring of the victorious
team. The winning team and their friends and followers, accompanied by
the music of their band, at once begin to parade through the places
near to the field of the game. On the next day the whole story appears
in the newspapers.
|
|
Aŋ ganitò ŋ maŋa paglalarò
naŋ sípa ay hindí karanyúwan sa maŋa báya ŋ
maliliìt sa provìnsiya, dátapuwat sa
malalakì lámaŋ na
báyan, gáya naŋ Maynílaʾ at iba
pà.
|
Such games of sipa as these are not common in the
little towns in the provinces, but only in the large cities, such as
Manila.
|
|
13. Aŋ kúra ŋ si Patúpat.
|
13. The priest
Patupat.
|
|
Sa
báya-ŋ-San-Migèl ay máy-roo ŋ
nagtirà ŋ isa ŋ táo noò ŋ 5maŋa
hulì ŋ áraw naŋ panahòn naŋ
Kastìlaʾ. Aŋ táo ŋ itò y nagáral at sa kanya ŋ
katalinúhan ay nàintindihan nyà aŋ maŋa
masamà ŋ palákad
naŋ maŋa kúra na sya ŋ maŋa maliliìt
na háre sa kanila ŋ
bayàn-bayàn.
|
In the last years of the Spanish time there dwelt
in the town of San Miguel a certain man. This man was educated and was
intelligent enough to understand the evil ways of the priests, who were
really little kings in their towns.
|
|
Sa San-Migèl
aŋ kúra ŋ nàdistíno ay isa ŋ
mabagsìk at maínit 10aŋ úlo. Aŋ
táwag sa kanyà naŋ maŋa táo ay “si
Patúpat.”
|
In San Miguel the priest who had the parish was a
violent and hot-headed man. The people called him
“Patupat.”
|
|
Isa ŋ liŋgo
aŋ táwu ŋ nábaŋgìt sa itaàs
nitò ay naparoòn sa simbáhan úpaŋ
makinìg naŋ sèrmon naŋ páreʾ.
Sapagkàt aŋ pári ŋ itò ay nagakála ŋ maŋa
walà ŋ pinagarálan aŋ kanyà ŋ
sinèsèrmunan ay
hindí sya nagpílit na makapagsalità ŋ
matwìd naŋ 15Tagálog. Aŋ kanya ŋ
pananalitàʾ ay walà ŋ púno t
dúlo, at halù-hálo ŋ pára ŋ kalámay. Gayon dìn
aŋ kanya ŋ isinèsèrmun ay hindí nàìibà sa
infiyèrno, purgatóriyo, maŋa salbáhi ŋ
táo-ŋ-báyan, at
katapusàn naŋ mundò.
|
One Sunday the man above mentioned went to church to
hear the sermon of the priest. As this priest thought that the people
to whom he was preaching were uneducated people, he took no pains to
speak Tagalog correctly. His speech had neither beginning nor end and
was mixed up like rice-pudding. Moreover, what he preached about was
never other than Hell, Purgatory, what brutes the people of the town
were, and the End of the World.
|
|
Naŋ aŋ
sèrmon nya ay nagumpisa nà, pumások sa
simbáhan 20aŋ áti ŋ kaybíga ŋ si
Pransìsko.
|
When the sermon began, our friend Francisco entered the
church.
|
|
Gáya naŋ
karanyúwan inumpisahàn naŋ kúra aŋ kanya
ŋ sèrmon sa ganitò
ŋ pananalitàʾ: “Manà
kapatìr-konkristyános!”
May ápat na pu
ŋ taòn na sya sa lúpa ŋ Katagalúgan, ay
hindí pa nya
nàtutúha ŋ sabíhi ŋ matwìd
aŋ “Maŋà
kapatìd-Koŋkristyános.” 25
|
As usual, the priest began his sermon with this
utterance: “Brezren and faylow-Christiannes!” Although he
had been for almost forty years now in the Tagalog country, he had not
yet learned to say correctly “Brethren and
fellow-Christians.”
|
|
Si Pransìsko ay
nàtàtayú sa isa ŋ lugàr na
malápit sa pùlpito, pinakiŋgàn nya ŋ mabúte aŋ
sèrmon na noò y wala ŋ ibà kuŋ hindí aŋ
makàlìlíbo nà ŋ inúlit naŋ
pári ŋ itò, at iyò y úkul sa maŋa hírap sa infiyèrno
at purgatóriyo at pagtutúlus naŋ
kandílaʾ 30at pagbibigày naŋ kwàlta sa
simbáhan úpaŋ màligtasàn aŋ
maŋa hírap na iyòn. Si Pransìsko ay
siniglàn naŋ malakì ŋ gálit,
sapagkàt nàpagkilála nya na nilòlóko
naŋ páre aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa táo, at walá sya ŋ
ibà ŋ pákay kuŋ hindí aŋ
takútin lámaŋ aŋ maŋa namàmáyan úpaŋ
kanilà ŋ payamánin aŋ simbáhan at
maŋa 35kúra.
|
Francisco stood in a place near the pulpit and listened
carefully to the sermon, which on that day contained nothing except
what had already been a thousand times repeated by the priest, namely
about the sufferings in Hell and Purgatory, the offering of candles and
the giving of money to the church in order to escape from these
sufferings.
Francisco was filled with great anger, for he saw that
the priest was fooling his people and had no other aim than to frighten
the townspeople so that they should enrich the church and priests.
|
|
Pagkaraàn
naŋ sèrmon ay hindí umwé si Kíko na
gáya naŋ karanyúwan, dátapuwat hinantày nya
ŋ matápus aŋ mísa. Pagkaraàn nitò y nagpáiwan syà sa
simbáhan. Kumúha sya naŋ maŋa papèl at sumúlat sya sa páre
naŋ ganitò:
|
After the sermon Kiko did not go home as usual, but
waited until mass was over. After mass he staid in the church until he
was alone. He took some pieces of paper and wrote to the priest as
follows:
|
|
40“Ámoŋ, nárinìg ko
pòʾ aŋ inyu ŋ sèrmon kanína ŋ
umága. Nàpagkìkilála ko na kayò y
nanìniwála ŋ may infiyèrno at may purgatóriyo. Akò y walà
ŋ paniwála díto. Sa liŋgo ŋ
dáratiŋ, kuŋ
íbig mo, prubahàn mo sa iyo ŋ sèrmon sa
maŋa táo na máy-roo ŋ infyèrno at purgatóriyo.
Pagkatápos pùprubahàn kò namàn
5sa kanilà na walà ŋ
infiyèrno ni purgatóriyo. Kuŋ ikàw aŋ paniwaláan naŋ maŋa
táo hindí báli ŋ ipabítay mo
akò dahilàn sa áki
ŋ pagkatálo at hindí paniniwálaʾ.
Dátapuwat, kuŋ akò y
manálo aŋ hiníhiliŋ ko lámaŋ sa
iyò ay pabayaàn mo akò ŋ makapagsábi sa madlàʾ na walà
ŋ infyèrno ni purgatóryo.”
|
“Father, I heard your sermon this morning. It is
apparent to me that you believe that there is a Hell and that there is
a Purgatory. I do not believe in these things. Next Sunday, if you
wish, you may prove to the people in your sermon that there is a Hell
and a Purgatory. When you are done, I shall try to prove to them that
there is no Hell and no Purgatory. If the people believe you, I do not
mind if you have me hanged for my defeat and my unbelief, but, if I am
the victor, all I ask of you is to allow me to say to the
people at large that there is neither a Hell nor a
Purgatory.”
|
|
10Aŋ ilà ŋ kópya naŋ
súlat na ytò ay idinikìt nya sa maŋa padèr naŋ simbáhan at
aŋ isà y ipinaabòt nya sa kúra.
|
Several copies of this letter he pasted to the walls of
the church, and one he sent to the priest.
|
|
Naŋ itò y
màbása ni Patúpat sumubò aŋ kanya
ŋ dugòʾ, at walà ŋ pagkàsyahàn aŋ kanya
ŋ gálit. Ipinatáwag nya aŋ maŋa gwàrdya-sibìl, at sa gabi
dìn naŋ liŋgò ŋ iyòn ay
pinapanhikàn 15at pinahanápan nya aŋ maŋa
bahày-bahày sa boo ŋ báyan, úpaŋ
hulíhin si Kíkoʾ.
Dátapuwat si Kíko ay hindí nila
nàhúle. Naŋ hápon dì ŋ iyòn ay
ibinalíta ni Kíko sa ilàn nya ŋ
matálik na kaybígan
aŋ kanyà ŋ ginawàʾ, at silà y
naŋàpamaŋhàʾ. Itinanòŋ nilà kuŋ bákit niya
ginawá iyòn at kuŋ hindí nya
napagkùkúro 20aŋ maŋyàyári sa
kanyà.
|
When Patupat read it, his blood boiled and his anger
knew no bounds. He had the gendarmes called, and on the evening of that
very Sunday he had all the houses in the town entered and searched, so
as to catch Kiko. But they did not catch Kiko. That same afternoon Kiko
told some of his intimate friends what he had done, and they were all
astonished. They asked him why he had done this thing and whether he
could not see what would happen to him.
|
|
Aŋ isà sa
kanilà y nagsábi naŋ ganitò:
“Magbalòt ka nà naŋ damìt, at umalìs ka ŋayon
dìn, kuŋ hindí mo gustò ŋ
màhúli ka naŋ
maŋa sundálo ni Patúpat at maipabarìl ka
kinàbukásan.”
|
One of them spoke thus: “Pack up some clothes and
go away right now, if you don’t want to be caught by
Patupat’s soldiers and shot tomorrow.”
|
|
Si Kíko ay
áyaw sumunòd sa kanyà ŋ páyo,
sapagkàt inakálà 25nya ŋ
tàtaŋgapìn ni Patúpat aŋ kanya ŋ
hámon tuŋkòl sa pagpapakilála sa maŋa
táo na walà ŋ infiyèrno ni purgatóriyo
at aŋ maŋa itò y paŋhúle lámaŋ
naŋ maŋa páre naŋ kwàlta. Kanyá
sya y nagpaábot naŋ
gabì sa báhay naŋ isa nyà ŋ
kaybígan.
|
Kiko refused to follow his advice, because he thought
that Patupat would accept his challenge about showing the people that
there was neither a Hell nor a Purgatory and that these things were
merely a device of the priests for getting money. Therefore he allowed
himself to be overtaken by night in the house of a friend of his.
|
|
Naŋ dumilim
nà at aŋ báya y nagúgulo dahilàn sa
paghahanàp 30naŋ maŋa gwàrdya-sibìl ay
saká pa lámaŋ nya nàpagkilála aŋ malakì ŋ
paŋánib na kanyà ŋ
kinàbìbiŋítan. Sapagkàt itò y
nàbalitáan nya
agàd, kanyá nagkaroòn sya naŋ panahò
ŋ makapagtágo sa isa
ŋ líhim na súlok sa báhay naŋ kanya
ŋ kaybígan.
|
Not until it was dark and the town was upset with the
searchings of the gendarmes did he recognize the great danger which he
was incurring. Since he had heard of this at once, he had time to hide
in a secret corner of his friend’s house.
|
|
Naŋ
makaraàn aŋ maŋa paghahanapàn sya y
lumabàs sa 35kanya ŋ taguàn, umwí sya,
nagbalòt naŋ ilà ŋ damìt,
nagpasiŋkàw naŋ isa
ŋ karumáta, at pagkakúha nya naŋ maŋa
bála naŋ barìl, binitbìt nya aŋ barìl, sumakày
sya sa karumáta, at napahatìd sa labàs naŋ báyan. Pagkaraàn
naŋ ila ŋ áraw ay namundok syà, kasáma naŋ ilà ŋ maŋa
táo-ŋ-báyan na hindí makatirà sa
loòb 40naŋ báyan, sapagkàt
nàkagalítan sila naŋ kúra o naŋ iba
pà ŋ Kastíla ŋ
may katuŋkúlan sa báyan.
|
When the house-searchings were over, he went out from
his hiding place, went home, wrapped up some clothes, had a wagon
hitched up, and, taking some rifle-bullets, shouldered his gun, got
into the wagon, and had himself driven out of town. After a few days he
went to the mountains together with several townsmen who could not stay
in the town because they had incurred the anger of the priest or of
some other Spanish official of the town.
|
|
Díto sa
pamumundok nyà sya y inabútan naŋ
paghihìmagsíkan lában sa maŋa Kastílaʾ naŋ
taò ŋ isa ŋ líbo walo ŋ daàn
walò ŋ pu t ánim.
|
There, in his stay in the mountains, he was overtaken by
the revolution against the Spaniards in the year 1886.
|
|
14. Si Maryáno at aŋ pári ŋ si
Patúpat.
|
14. Mariano and the priest
Patupat.
|
|
Si Maryáno
ay isà sa íila ŋ botikáriyo sa
báya-ŋ-San-Migèl. Sya
y nagìŋ isà sa maŋa nasawi-ŋ-pálad
dahilàn sa pagswày sa maŋa kautusàn naŋ kúra ŋ si
Patúpat. Sya y may famíliya; 5bukòd sa asáwa
ay may dalawà sya ŋ anàk, isà ŋ
dadalawáhi ŋ taòn at
isà ŋ kabàbágu ŋ paŋanàk pa
lámaŋ.
|
Mariano was one of the very few apothecaries in
the town of San Miguel. He was one of the people who fell into
misfortune through disobeying the orders of the priest Patupat. He had
a family; beside his wife he had two children, one two years old and
one new-born.
|
|
Isa ŋ áraw
aŋ kanyà ŋ alíla ay nagkasakìt. Sya y
may bayàw na médiko,
kanyá aŋ alílaʾ ay ipinagamùt nya
díto na walà ŋ
báyad, at aŋ gamòt namàn ay ibinigày
nya na walà ŋ báyad 10sa alílaʾ.
Naŋ makaraàn aŋ ilà ŋ áraw ay
gumalìŋ aŋ alílaʾ at itò y nagakála ŋ
magpahiŋà ŋ sandalìʾ sa búkid.
Kanyàʾ binayáran nya aŋ kanya ŋ útaŋ at
napaálam sya kay Maryáno úpaŋ magtirà
sa búkid. Hindí
nalaúnan aŋ pagtitira nyà sa búkid at aŋ
alíla ŋ itò y nagkasakìt na
mulìʾ, at aŋ nagiŋ dúlo y aŋ kanya
ŋ 15pagkamatày.
|
One day his servant fell sick. He had a brother-in-law
who was a doctor, so he had him treat the servant without charge, and
he gave the servant medicine without charge. After some days the
servant got well and decided to rest for a while in the country.
Accordingly he paid his debt and took his leave of Mariano for a stay
in the country. His stay in the country did not last long, before he
fell sick anew, and the end was his death.
|
|
Sa Filipínas naŋ maŋa panahò
ŋ yaòn ay hindí maàári ŋ huwàg pabendisyunàn aŋ
isa ŋ patày bágo mábaòn. Itò y
hindí ipinahìhintúlot naŋ maŋa
kúra, dátapuwat aŋ pagsasáma na hindí
kasàl naŋ isa ŋ
babáye at laláki ay hindí nila masyádo
ŋ pinápansìn, 20palibhása y
gawá rin namàn nilà.
|
In the Philippines in those days it was not allowable to
bury a dead person without first having him blessed by a priest. The
priests did not allow this, but they did not much mind the living
together of a man and woman not married, for the reason that they did
this themselves.
|
|
Aŋ patày na alílà ni
Maryáno ay lubhà ŋ mahírap at aŋ kanyà ŋ maŋa
kamagának ay mahihírap dìn at walà ŋ
ikakáya ŋ magbáyad
sa halagà na sinísiŋìl ni Patúpat.
Dáhil díto y walà ŋ magpabaòn sa katawàn naŋ
alílaʾ.
|
The deceased servant of Mariano was very poor and his
relatives also were poor and had not the means to pay the price
demanded by Patupat. Thus there was no one to see to the burial of the
servant’s body.
|
|
25Naŋ màláman itò ni
Patúpat ay ipinatáwag nya si Maryáno at
sinábi nya ŋ siyà aŋ dápat
magpabaòn sa patày at siyà aŋ magbáyad naŋ gàstos. Sa
akálà ni Maryáno ay lumálampàs
aŋ kasalbahíhan ni
Patúpat. Kanyá sinábi nya na hindi nyà sya
bàbayáran sa
pagbabaòn naŋ patày, káhit na anò
aŋ maŋyáre.
|
When Patupat learned this, he had Mariano called and
said that it was his place to have the dead man buried and to pay the
costs. In Mariano’s opinion Patupat’s insolence was getting
beyond bounds. Therefore he said that he would not pay him for the
burying of the dead man, no matter what happened.
|
|
30Si Patúpat ay sinubhàn naŋ
gálit. Ipinabaòn niya aŋ patày at sa áraw di ŋ iyòn ay
naparoòn sya sa hùkúman at ipinagsakdàl
nya si Mariyáno
úpaŋ pagbayáran siyà naŋ gàstos
sa pagbebendisyòn sa patày.
|
Patupat boiled with rage. He had the dead man buried and
on the same day went to court and sued Mariano for the cost of blessing
the dead man.
|
|
Naŋ
dumatìŋ aŋ paghuhùkúman si
Maryáno y naparoòn at 35naŋ itinanòŋ naŋ hukòm
kuŋ anò aŋ íbig nya ŋ sabíhin
tuŋkòl sa sakdàl na
iyòn, ay sinábi nya itò ŋ
sumúsunòd:
|
When the session of the court came, Mariano was present,
and when the judge asked what he had to say to this accusation, he
spoke as follows:
|
|
“Ginoò
ŋ Hwès, aŋ namatày na iyòn ay
walá na sa áki ŋ kapaŋyaríhan,
sapagkàt hindí ku nà sya alíla naŋ sya
y namatày. Noo ŋ syà y máy sakit pa
lámaŋ ay ipinagamòt ko syà ŋ wala ŋ
40báyad, at binigyàn ko syà
ŋ wala ŋ báyad naŋ gamòt. Nagawá ku
nà aŋ áki ŋ katuŋkúlan sa
áki ŋ kápuwa táo at aŋ
katuŋkúla ŋ
iniyátas sa ákin ni Bathálaʾ. Isà sa
maŋa katuŋkúlan naŋ maŋa
párèʾ ay aŋ magpabaòn naŋ maŋa
patày. Ŋayò ŋ aŋ táo ŋ iyòn ay patay nà, bákit
namàn hindí magawá naŋ pári ŋ
itò aŋ kanya ŋ
katuŋkúlan na walà ŋ úpa,
yámaŋ ito namàn ay hindí maŋyàyári kuŋ may káya
aŋ maŋa kamagának naŋ namatày?”
|
“Your Honor, this man who died was no longer in my
care, for he was no longer my servant when he died. When he was still
sick, I had him treated without charge and gave him medicine without
charge. I have done my duty to my fellow-man and the duty placed upon
me by the Lord. One of the duties of the priests is to provide burial
for the dead. Now this man is dead, why cannot this priest do his duty
without receiving pay, since even this would not happen, if the
relatives of the deceased had means?”
|
|
5Pagkaraàn naŋ maŋa ilan pà
ŋ maŋa tanòŋ naŋ hukòm sa kúra at kay Mariyáno ay
tinápus nya aŋ paghuhùkúman, at
ipinaháyag nya ŋ si
Mariyáno ay nása katwíran at aŋ kúra y
dápat magpasyènsya sa
pagkábendisyon nyà naŋ patày na wala ŋ
úpa.
|
After asking some further questions of the priest and of
Mariano, the judge closed the hearing and announced that Mariano was in
the right and that the priest would have to put up with having blessed
the dead man without payment.
|
|
Naŋ makaraàn
itò y lálu ŋ lumakì aŋ gálit ni
Patúpat kay 10Maryáno, at
pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ áraw ay
ipinagsakdàl niya ŋ mulí si Mariyáno.
Ŋayòn ay iba namàn aŋ kanya ŋ
sakdàl. Isinakdàl niya
sa hùkúman na si Maryáno ay isà ŋ
Masòn, sapagkàt sya y
hindí nagsísimbà nì hindí
naŋúŋumpisàl nì hindí rin nagmàmáno sa
páreʾ. Aŋ maŋa Masòn ay kaáway
naŋ Romanìsmo 15at sa makatwìd ay kaáway dìn
naŋ pàmahalaàn sa Filipínas naŋ maŋa panahò ŋ iyòn,
at dáhil díto y kanya ŋ ipináyo na si Maryáno y ipatápon sa
ibà ŋ lupaìn.
|
When this had happened Patupat’s wrath against
Mariano greatly increased, and after a few days he again entered a
charge against Mariano. This time he made a different accusation. He
complained to the court that Mariano was a Mason, because he did not
come to church, did not confess, and did not kiss the priest’s
hand. The Masons are enemies of the Catholic Church and, in
consequence, were enemies also of the government in the Philippines in
those days; and therefore he suggested that Mariano be deported.
|
|
Naŋ
màbalitáan ni Maryáno aŋ sakdàl na
yitò ni Patúpat ay
inakálà nya ŋ walá na sya ŋ
pagása kuŋ hindí aŋ magtagò o 20umílag
sa maŋà maŋhuhúli sa kanyà.
Kanyàʾ aŋ ginawá nya ay lumwàs sya sa Maynílaʾ at doòn
sya nagtagòʾ.
|
When Mariano heard of this accusation of Patupat, he
decided that his only hope was to hide or to escape from those who were
to arrest him. Accordingly what he did was to go down to Manila, and
there he hid.
|
|
Dátapuwat doon màn ay nàhúli
rìn syà naŋ maŋa gwàrdya-sivìl.
Kasáma naŋ pitò o
walò ŋ taga iba t ibà ŋ báyan sya y
inilúlan sa isà ŋ
bapòr at dinalà sila sa ibabá naŋ
kapuluà-ŋ-Filipínas. 25At doòn
pagdatìŋ nilà aŋ ibà sa kanila ŋ
magkakasáma ay
pinagbábarìl naŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ
naghatìd sa kanilà, sapagkàt iyòn aŋ útos naŋ
pinúno ŋ nagpatápon sa maŋa táo ŋ
iyòn.
|
But even there he was caught by the gendarmes. Together
with seven or eight men from various towns he was put into a steamboat
and they were taken to the southern part of the Philippine Islands. And
when they arrived there some of their number were shot by the soldiers
who accompanied them, for this was ordered by the officials who sent
these men into banishment.
|
|
Dátapuwat si
Maryáno y hindí nagiŋ isà sa maŋa
nábaril na 30iyòn. Doòn sya nátirà
haŋgàŋ sa pananálo naŋ maŋa
Amerikáno ay nagkaroòn
sya naŋ kalayáa ŋ makabábalik sa kanya ŋ
famíliya. Naŋ itò y
datnan nyà aŋ isa nyà ŋ anàk ay
pitò na ŋ taòn aŋ gúlaŋ at aŋ ikalawà namàn
ay limà na ŋ taòn.
|
However, Mariano was not one of those who were shot. He
staid there until, after the victory of the Americans, he was given the
liberty of returning to his family. When he came back to the latter,
his one child was seven years old and the second, five.
|
|
15. Aŋ Intsìk na
màŋaŋátam.
|
15. The story of the
Chinese carpenter.
|
|
35Si Hwàn ay isa ŋ alwáge na may
kápit-báhay na Intsèk na aluwáge
rìn. Aŋ Intsèk na ytò ay isa ŋ
magalìŋ na alwáge at aŋ kanya ŋ kínis ay
nàpagkìkilála sa magalìŋ nya ŋ
paggámit naŋ katàm.
Isa ŋ áraw nakábili syà naŋ isa ŋ
piráso-ŋ-káhoy na
may ápat na pu ŋ paà aŋ hábaʾ.
Itù y kanya ŋ nilínis. Sinubúkan 40nya kuŋ
makakùkúha syà naŋ pinagkatamàn na
walà ŋ patìd
sa boò ŋ hábà naŋ káhoy.
Dahilàn sa húsay naŋ kanyà ŋ kasaŋkápan at sa kanyà
ŋ kabutíhan sa pagaalwáge, aŋ bágay na
yòn ay nagìŋ
pára ŋ walà ŋ ano màn sa kaniyà.
Twì ŋ isùsúluŋ niya aŋ katàm
ay nakakùkúha naŋ pinagkatamàn na walà
ŋ patìd, 5ápat na pu ŋ paà aŋ
hábaʾ. Úpaŋ ipakilála nya sa
kápit-báhay niya ŋ
aluwági ŋ Tagálog aŋ kanyà ŋ
galìŋ, itò y kanyà ŋ pinadalhàn
naŋ isa ŋ pinagkatamàn
áraw-áraw.
|
Juan was a carpenter who had for neighbor a
Chinaman who also was a carpenter. This Chinaman was a skilled
carpenter and his cleverness showed itself in his skilful use of the
plane. One day he bought a piece of wood forty feet in length. This he
proceeded to smoothe. He tried to see if he could obtain shavings
without a break for the whole length of the wood. What with the
excellence of his tools and his skill at carpentry, this feat
went off as if there was nothing to it. Every time he pushed his plane
he obtained a shaving without a break, forty feet in length. In order
to show this his skill to his neighbor, the Tagalog carpenter, he sent
him one shaving every day.
|
|
Aŋ aluwági
ŋ Tagálog na si Hwàn ay nàpagúlat sa
galìŋ naŋ Intsèk. Úpaŋ gantihìn nya aŋ
kanyà ŋ maŋa tinaŋgàp na
pinagkatamàn, 10sinubúkan dìn nyà ŋ
kumatàm at ipadalà sa Intsèk aŋ pinagkatamàn. Dátapuwat
aŋ pinakamahábà nya ŋ nàkúha na
pinagkatamàn ay may-roon
lámaŋ na labì ŋ limà ŋ paà.
Itò y kahyá-hiyà
ŋ ipadalà sa Intsèk.
|
The Tagalog carpenter, Juan, marvelled at the skill of
the Chinaman. In order to make return for the shavings he had received,
he too tried to use the plane and to send the shavings to the Chinaman.
However, the longest shavings he succeeded in getting were only fifteen
feet. These it would have been humiliating to send to the Chinaman.
|
|
Si Hwàn ay
magalìŋ gumámit naŋ daràs at siya y
nakapagpàpakínis 15naŋ
tablà sa pamamagítan lámaŋ naŋ
daràs. Hindí na
kayiláŋa ŋ gamítan naŋ katàm
aŋ ano mà ŋ káhoy na kanya ŋ darasìn, dátapuwat aŋ
pinagdarasàn ay maŋa tátal na maiiklí lámaŋ, hindí súkat
pagkàkilanlàn naŋ kanyà ŋ
galìŋ, at hindí nya màipadalà sa Intsèk.
|
Juan was skilled in the use of the daras, and he
was able to smoothe boards by the use of the daras alone. Any
piece of wood which he had chopped smooth with the daras did not
require the use of the plane; but the pieces he chopped off were only
short splinters, not suited to show his skill, and he could not send
them to the Chinaman.
|
|
20Hábaŋ si
Hwàn ay walà ŋ màláma ŋ
gawìn, aŋ Intsìk namàn ay hindí naglúlubày naŋ
pagpapadalà naŋ pinagkatamà ŋ
mahahábaʾ. Siniglàn
si Hwàn naŋ gálit. Sinuŋgabàn nya
aŋ kanya ŋ daràs at
pinarunàn nya aŋ Intsèk. Itò y
nàpagúlat at natákot naŋ màkíta
si Hwàn.
|
While Juan did not know what to do, the Chinaman did not
stop sending long shavings. Juan was filled with anger. He took his
daras and went over to the Chinaman’s. The latter was
surprised and frightened when he saw Juan.
|
|
25Sinábe nitò: “Anò aŋ
gustu mu ŋ sabíhin sa maŋa ipinagpapadalà
mo ŋ pinagkatamàn sa
ákin? Akò y binuwísit mo at itò y iyo ŋ pagbàbayáran.
Pùputúlin ko aŋ buhuk mò sa
pamamagítan naŋ daràs na itò.”
|
The latter said: “What do you mean to say by
sending me those shavings? You are offensive to me and you shall pay
for it. I am going to cut your hair with this daras.”
|
|
Aŋ Intsèk ay natákot,
sapagkàt, pag aŋ úlo nya y tinamaàn 30na naŋ
daràs na iyòn, ay pího ŋ hindí sya
mabùbúhay. Sya y nagkàkawalàʾ, dátapuwat
sinuŋgabàn sya ni Hwàn, iginápus sya sa baŋkòʾ, at
inumpisahàn nya ŋ dinaràs aŋ úlo
naŋ Intsèk.
|
The Chinaman was frightened, for he knew that if that
daras struck his head, he would surely not survive. He tried to
escape, but Juan seized him, tied him to a bench, and began to use the
daras on the Chinaman’s head.
|
|
Aŋ daràs ay
isa ŋ kasaŋkápa ŋ malakì, gáya
naŋ isà ŋ píko, at mabigàt, dátapuwat sa magalìŋ
na kamày ni Hwàn itò y nagiŋ 35pára ŋ isa
ŋ guntìŋ lámaŋ. Aŋ lagpàk
naŋ daràs sa úlo naŋ Intsìk ay lubhà ŋ banáyad, at
aŋ maŋa buhòk lámaŋ aŋ
pinùpútol naŋ patalìm.
|
The daras is a large tool, the size of a pick,
and heavy, but in Juan’s skilful hand it was like a mere pair of
scissors. The descent of the daras on the Chinaman’s head
was very gentle, and only the hair was cut by the edge.
|
|
Sa tákot
naŋ Intsèk itò y nagsisigàw na sinábe:
“Wapélo! Daluhàn
ninyò kò, masamà táo si Hwàn,
hindí Kilistyáno!”
|
The Chinaman in his fright shouted and said:
“Wapelo! Come helpee me, Juan bad man, not Chlistian!”
|
|
40Itò y nárinig naŋ maŋa
kápit-báhay at ibà ŋ
nagsìsipaglakàd.
|
This was heard by the neighbors and passers-by.
|
|
Kanyá
pumások silà sa gàwáan naŋ
Intsèk at doòn ay sinábi sa kanilà ni Hwàn: “Hwag kayù
ŋ makialàm díto! Aŋ Intsìk na yitò y hindí ko
sinàsaktàn. Ákin lámaŋ
pinùputlàn naŋ buhòk.”
|
Accordingly they came into the Chinaman’s
workshop, but there Juan said to them: “Don’t you mix in
here! I am not hurting this Chinaman. I am just cutting his
hair.”
|
|
At patúluy
dìn aŋ kanyà ŋ pagdaràs.
|
And he kept on with his chopping.
|
|
Naŋ mapútul
na nya ŋ lahàt aŋ buhòk naŋ Intsèk
ay malakì 5aŋ nagìŋ
pagkámaŋhà naŋ nagsìsipanoòd,
sapagkàt aŋ buhòk naŋ Intsèk ay pára ŋ ginupìt naŋ
guntìŋ naŋ isa ŋ bihasà ŋ
barbéro. Aŋ Intsìk
namàn, naŋ màkíta nya sa salamìn na
wala ŋ súgat aŋ kanya ŋ úlo, ay malaki
rìn aŋ nagìŋ
pagkámaŋhàʾ, at hindí mapatìd aŋ pagpúri nya sa
galìŋ ni Hwàn sa paggámit naŋ
daràs.
|
When the Chinaman’s hair was completely cut, the
onlookers were greatly astonished, for the Chinaman’s hair was as
if cut by the shears of a skilful barber. The Chinaman too, when he saw
in the looking-glass that his head was unhurt, was greatly astonished
and did not stop praising Juan’s skill in the use of the
daras.
|
|
1016. Isa ŋ
táo ŋ may birtùd naŋ usà.
|
16. A man who had the
power of a deer.
|
|
Mínsan sa
isa ŋ báyan sa kapuluà-ŋ-Filipínas ay
náhayàg aŋ paŋálan naŋ isa ŋ táo sa
kanya ŋ maŋa kababáyan at maŋa
kápit-báyan, dahilàn sa hindí
karanyúwa ŋ lakàs nya sa pagtakbò at pagluksò.
|
In a certain town in the Philippine Islands there
once became celebrated the name of a certain man, both among his
fellow-townsmen and the people of the neighboring towns, on account of
his unusual strength in running and jumping.
|
|
15Sya y isa ŋ táo ŋ hindí
mayábaŋ, dátapuwat may kauntì ŋ talíno sa paghahánap at gayon
dìn may kauntì ŋ tápaŋ. Aŋ kanya ŋ hindí karanyúwa
ŋ kapaláran ay hindí nya ipinagmayabàŋ
ní hindí nya
ipinagkayilàʾ kuŋ anò aŋ
pinaŋgàgalíŋan naŋ kanyà ŋ dí karanyúwa ŋ
lakàs. Sinábi nya sa maŋà
mapagusísaʾ 20na aŋ pinaŋgàgalíŋan
naŋ kanya ŋ lakàs ay aŋ aŋkìn niya
ŋ birtùd naŋ
usà. Hindí nya sinábe kuŋ papáno
aŋ pagkápasa kanyà
naŋ birtùd na iyòn, dátapuwat siya y
hindí marámot sa pagbibigày-loòb úpaŋ
ikatúluŋ niya sa maŋà kakilála o
hindìʾ aŋ kanya ŋ lakàs.
|
He was not a proud man, but he had some astuteness in
money matters and also some courage. He did not let his rare good
fortune make him proud, nor did he lie about the source of his unusual
strength. He told those who were curious that the source of his
strength was the power of the deer which he had made his own.
He did not tell how this power had come into his
possession, but he was not stingy about doing favors by helping with
his strength both friends and strangers.
|
|
25Sya y may pagíbig na yumáman,
gáya naŋ karamíhan naŋ táo, at díto nya ginámit aŋ
kanya ŋ lakàs. Paráti sya ŋ
nakìkipagtakbúhan, at
aŋ maŋa takbúha ŋ itò y lágì
na ŋ pinagkatalunàn naŋ marámi ŋ
salapèʾ. Sya ay lágì na ŋ may
malakì ŋ pustà.
Walá sya ŋ itináŋì na
pinakìkipagtakbuhàn. Kuŋ mìnsan 30nakìkipagtakbúhan sya sa kápwa
táo, kuŋ mínsan ay sa kabáyo, sa áso, at sa iba pà ŋ
háyop na matúli ŋ tumakbò.
|
Like most people, he wanted to get rich, and it was
toward this end that he used his strength. He often entered into races,
and these races were always means of winning much money. He always made
large bets. He refused no one that wanted to race with him. Sometimes
he ran races with people, sometimes with horses, with dogs, and with
other animals that are fast at running.
|
|
Pagkaraàn
naŋ ila ŋ áraw ay dumámi aŋ naípon
nya ŋ salapìʾ na
pinanalúnan sa pustáhan. Gayon dìn aŋ kanya
ŋ maŋa kaybígan na
nagsipustà sa kanyà ay nagkaroòn naŋ
marámi ŋ kwàlta. 35Naŋ
màpagaláman naŋ maŋa táo na syà y
may birtùd naŋ usà ay hindí na sya íbig labánan sa
takbúhan. Dáhil díto y úpaŋ hwag máhintoʾ aŋ kanya
ŋ pananálo at pagkíta naŋ kwaltà, ay
nagbíbigay syà naŋ
malalakì ŋ palúgit sa kanya ŋ
kinàkalában. Dáhil sa kalakhàn naŋ maŋa
palúgit na ibinigay nyà ay marámi 40rì ŋ
táo ŋ lumában sa kanyà. Dátapuwat
tuwí nà y sya aŋ nagìŋ mànanalò. Gayon dìn sa
maŋa pakikipagluksúhan paráti nà ŋ
syà aŋ
nanànálo.
|
After a few days the money he had won in bets made up a
large sum. His friends also, who had bet on him, got much money. When
people came to know that he had the power of a deer, they did not want
to run against him. Therefore, so as not to stop winning and making
money, he gave large handicaps to his opponents. The handicaps which he
gave were so great that many people contended with him. Still he always
came out the winner. In jumping-matches also he was always
victorious.
|
|
Dátapuwat,
kuŋ malaki màn aŋ kabutíha ŋ
nàkamtan nyà sa
birtùd na ytò, ay máy-ron dì ŋ
ilà ŋ kahirápan na nàkamtan 5nyà dahilan díto. Dahilan
dìn sa kahirápa ŋ itò ay hindí nya
natagalà ŋ
aŋkinìn hábaŋ búhay nya aŋ
birtùd na iyòn. Dahilàn sa birtùd na iyòn sya y nagìŋ
lubhà ŋ magugulatìn. Aŋ maŋa kalabòg, íŋay, at tahòl
naŋ áso kuŋ gabì ay hindí
nagpatúlug sa kanyà.
Dahilàn sa maŋa íŋay na yitò, kuŋ
natùtúlug sya ay 10palági ŋ
nàpàpaluksò. Lálù na, kuŋ isa
ŋ tahòl naŋ áso, halimbáwaʾ, aŋ makàgísiŋ sa
kanyà, sya y nàpàpaluksò naŋ
lubhà ŋ mataàs sa
kanyà ŋ hihigàn, at bágo sya
pagsa-ulàn naŋ saríle, ay nagtàtatakbò na syà. Sa pagluksu
nyà ŋ itò na hindí sinásadyaʾ
ay walá sya ŋ
nagígiŋ pagiíŋat at karanyúwa y
umáabot 15syà sa ituktòk naŋ
bubuŋàn, at sa kababáan nitò y lági
ŋ nalálamog aŋ kanya
ŋ katawàn o kayà y nagkàkabúkul
syà sa úlo, dahilàn sa pagkáhampas nyà sa
bubuŋàn. Gayon dìn sa kanya ŋ hindí sinásadya ŋ pagtakbò
pagkágisiŋ nyà dahilàn sa
pagkàgúlat, ay
nagkàkaumpòg-umpòg aŋ boò ŋ
katawan nyà sa maŋa 20dindìŋ naŋ
kanya ŋ báhay.
|
However, though the advantages which he gained through
this power were great, yet there were also some disadvantages which he
obtained through it. On account of these disadvantages he did not
manage to keep this power as his own through all his life. Through this
power he had become very nervous. The sounds of falling bodies, noises,
and the barking of dogs at night, did not allow
him to sleep. These noises often made him start up with a jump from his
sleep. Especially when the barking of a dog, for instance, woke him up,
he jumped high up from his bed, and before he recovered his wits he was
running at full speed. He could exercise no care about his involuntary
jumping up and usually went way up to the ceiling, and, since this was
low, his body got full of bruises and his head full of bumps from
striking against the ceiling. Likewise in his unintentional running
whenever he woke up with a start, his whole body got knocked again and
again against the walls of his house.
|
|
Itò y isà
ŋ mahírap na tìísin, at inakálà
nya ŋ hindí sya mabùbúhay nà ŋ malwàt
dahilàn sa hindí pagkàkatúlog kuŋ
gabì. Kanyá
inakálà nya ŋ itápon aŋ birtùd na
ytò pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ áraw. Naŋ sumápit
aŋ ikapitù ŋ áraw naŋ kanya ŋ
pagaáreʾ 25sa birtùd ay sya y lubhà ŋ hirap
nà at inakálà nya ŋ sya y mamámatay nà sa hírap. Aŋ
úlu nya ay bukulàn. Aŋ mukhá nya ay marámi ŋ pasàʾ at
káhit na hindí sya nabalían naŋ butò,
aŋ maŋa lamàn
namàn nya ay lubhà ŋ lamòg.
|
This was hard to bear, and he thought that he should not
live long, what with not sleeping of nights. Therefore he decided to
get rid of this power in a few days. When the seventh day of his
possession of the power came, he was very sore and thought he should
die of soreness. His head was covered with bumps. His face was full of
black and blue marks, and though he had broken no bones, his muscles
were badly bruised.
|
|
Dáhil
díto y walà ŋ kibú sya ŋ naparoòn
sa isa ŋ páraŋ at 30itinápon nya
doòn aŋ birtùd na nàpúlut nya,
yámaŋ marámi na rìn lámaŋ siya
ŋ salapì ŋ pinanalúnan.
|
Therefore, without saying a word, he went to a forest
and there abandoned the power which he had got hold of, seeing that he
had already won much money.
|
|
17. Aŋ alíla ŋ
uŋgòʾ.
|
17. The pet monkey.
|
|
Siy Andrès ay máy-roo ŋ isa
ŋ alíla ŋ uŋgò na kanyà ŋ
lubhà ŋ
minámahàl, sapagkàt aŋ uŋgu ŋ
itò y nagbíbigay sa kanyà naŋ 35malakì ŋ
serbísyo. Kuŋ gabì ipinaglàlátag sya
naŋ banìg naŋ uŋgo ŋ itò; kuŋ umága ay
iniháhandàʾ aŋ kanyà ŋ
paŋhilámos, at aŋ ano
mà ŋ kanya ŋ iyútos ay sinúsunod
naŋ uŋgòʾ.
|
Andrés had a pet monkey which he prized
very highly, because this monkey gave him much service. At night the
monkey spread out his sleeping-mat for him; in the morning it handed
him his water for washing, and whatever order he gave was obeyed by the
monkey.
|
|
Gabì-gabì
aŋ uŋgu ŋ itò y natùtúlog sa
ilálim naŋ kátri ŋ tinùtulúgan naŋ kanya ŋ
paŋinoòn. Itò y hindí gustò naŋ
kanya 40ŋ paŋinoòn,
sapagkàt, dahilàn sa kanya ŋ malakì ŋ
kabuluhàn, ay íbig ni Andrès na syà y
bigyàn naŋ isa ŋ mabúte ŋ lugàr na
tulugàn.
Dátapuwat, káhit na gánu ŋ pagpílit
aŋ gawìn ni Andrès, ay hindí nya mapatúlog sa ibà ŋ
lugàr aŋ kanya ŋ alíla ŋ
uŋgòʾ.
|
Every night this monkey slept underneath the bedstead on
which its master slept. This was not pleasing to the latter, for owing
to its great value, Andrés wanted to give it a good place to
sleep in. However, no matter what efforts Andrés made to force
it, his pet monkey could not be brought to sleep in any other
place.
|
|
Siy Andrès ay isa
ŋ táwu ŋ may tákot at pagíbig sa
Dyòs. 5Kanyá gabi-gabì bágu sya
matúlog ay nagkúkurus syà at
tumàtáwag sya sa
Dyòs. Sa óras naŋ kanya ŋ paghigà
gabi-gabì ay dinàratnan
nà nyà na nása ilálim naŋ kanya ŋ
kátri aŋ uŋgòʾ. Mínsan màn ay hindí sya náuna
sa paghigàʾ sa uŋgu ŋ itò.
|
Andrés was a man who feared and loved God.
Therefore, every night, before he went to sleep, he made the Sign of
the Cross and called upon God. At his bed-time every night he found
that his monkey was already under his bedstead. Not once did he get
ahead of the monkey in going to bed.
|
|
Isa ŋ áraw
aŋ párì sa báyan ay dumálaw kay
Andrès sa 10kanya ŋ báhay. Pagkaraàn naŋ
ilà ŋ sandalì ŋ pagsasàlitáan ay
ibinalítà niy Andrès sa páreʾ na sya y
máy-roo ŋ isà ŋ alíla ŋ uŋgò na lubhà ŋ
malakì aŋ kabuluhàn, sapagkàt sya y
pinagsìsilbihà ŋ
mabúte, at káhit na anò aŋ iyútos nya
ay sinúsunod, at sinábi
pa nyà ŋ masípag pa káy sa maŋa iba
nyà ŋ alílaʾ aŋ uŋgo 15ŋ iyòn.
|
One day the priest of the town visited Andrés in
his house. After some time had elapsed in conversation, Andrés
told the priest that he had a pet monkey which was very useful, because
it served him well and obeyed his every command, and he also said that
this monkey was more diligent than his other servants.
|
|
Malakì aŋ
nagìŋ pagtatakà naŋ páreʾ, at
hiniliŋ nyà ŋ ipakíta sa kanyà aŋ
uŋgò ŋ iyòn. Kanyá tináwag ny
Andrès aŋ uŋgòʾ. Hindí gáya naŋ
dáti, na sa isà ŋ táwag lámaŋ niy
Andrès ay
lumàlápit agad-agàd aŋ
uŋgòʾ, ŋayòn makása-m-pu ŋ
táwag 20nà ay walá pa
syà. Siy Andrès ay nagálit, nagtindìg, at
hinánap nya sa maŋa
sulok-sulòk naŋ báhay aŋ
uŋgòʾ.
|
The priest was much surprised and asked that the monkey
be shown to him. So Andrés called the monkey. Usually the monkey
came at once at a single call by Andrés, but on this occasion it
did not appear even when he had called ten times. Andrés got
angry, arose, and looked for the monkey in the nooks and corners of the
house.
|
|
Ito y
nàkíta nya sa isa ŋ súlok at nakakápit
na mabúte sa isa ŋ
halíge. Tináwag nya at kanya ŋ pinaáalis sa
súlok, dátapuwat aŋ uŋgò y áyaw
umalìs doòn, káhit na anò aŋ
gawìn sa 25kanyà.
Dáhil díto ay tináwag nya aŋ
páreʾ, úpaŋ itò y doòn tiŋnàn sa súlok aŋ
alílà nya ŋ uŋgòʾ.
|
He found it in a corner, clinging tightly to a post. He
called it and tried to get it out of the corner, but the monkey would
not come away, no matter what Andrés did to it. Therefore he
called the priest to look at his pet monkey there in the corner.
|
|
Pagkálapit
naŋ páreʾ aŋ uŋgò y kuminìg sa
tákot. Nagkaroòn naŋ hinálà aŋ
párèʾ na aŋ uŋgù ŋ iyòn
ay isà ŋ dimónyo. Kanyàʾ aŋ ginawá nya y nagkurùs sya at
pagkabendisyòn nya naŋ kauntì 30ŋ túbig ay
niwisikàn nya aŋ uŋgòʾ.
|
At the approach of the priest the monkey trembled with
fear. The priest conceived the suspicion that this monkey was an evil
spirit. So he made the Sign of the Cross, and blessing a little water,
sprinkled it over the monkey.
|
|
Pagdápoʾ sa
katawàn nitò naŋ túbig ay pumutòk na
pára ŋ isa ŋ barìl, at sa lugàr naŋ
uŋgòʾ ay walá silà ŋ
nàkíta kuŋ hindí asu lámaŋ na agàd
nawalàʾ.
|
When the water struck the latter’s body, there was
a report like that of a gun, and in the place of the monkey they saw
only some smoke, which soon disappeared.
|
|
Pagkaraàn
nitò siniyásat naŋ páre si Andrès
tuŋkùl sa kanya 35ŋ paniniwála sa
Diyòs. Sinábi ny Andrès na hindí
nabàbágo aŋ matíbay nya ŋ paniniwálaʾ at
gabi-gabì nagdádasal syà bágo matúlog. Siniyásat dìn
naŋ páreʾ kuŋ saàn tumùtúlog
aŋ uŋgòʾ. Sinábe ni Andrès na itò y
tumúlog gabi-gabì sa ilàlim naŋ kanyà
ŋ kátri ŋ tulugàn.
|
Thereupon the priest questioned Andrés concerning
his faith in God. Andrés said that his firm faith had not
changed and that he prayed every night before going to sleep. The
priest then asked where the monkey used to sleep. Andrés
answered that it slept every night under his bedstead.
|
|
40Pagkaraàn nitò y ipinakilála sa
kanyà naŋ páreʾ na aŋ uŋgù
ŋ iyòn ay isà
ŋ dimónyo na umáabàŋ sa kanyà, at
kuŋ syà y sumála
naŋ pagtáwag sa Diyòs bágu matúlog, sa
gabì di ŋ iyòn ay
ihùhúlug sya naŋ dimónyo sa infyèrno.
|
Thereupon the priest informed him that this monkey was
an evil spirit which had been lying in wait for him, and that if he had
ever failed to call upon God before he went to sleep, on that very
night the evil spirit would have thrown him into Hell.
|
|
18. Aŋ matandá sa punsò sa
liwánag naŋ áraw.
|
18. The old man of the
ant-hill by light of day.
|
|
Si Pédro ay
isà ŋ matápaŋ na laláke. Paráti
sya ŋ nakárinig naŋ
maŋa kwènto tuŋkùl sa asuwàŋ,
duwèndi, maŋkukúlam, at maŋà matandá sa punsò,
dátapuwat aŋ ipinagtátakà ni Pédro
5ay
kuŋ bákit hindí sya makátagpo nì
káhit isà naŋ maŋà bágay na itò. Íbig niya ŋ
makàkíta naŋ isa man lámaŋ sa
kanilà, úpaŋ màláman nya kuŋ túnay
ŋàʾ na silà y máy-roo ŋ maŋa
kapaŋyaríha ŋ hindí karanyúwan sa
karamíhan naŋ táo.
|
Pedro was a brave man. He had often heard stories
about vampires, dwarves, sorcerers, and old men of the ant-hill, but
what made Pedro wonder was why he had never chanced to meet even a
single one of these creatures. He wanted to get a sight of at least one
of them, so that he might know whether it was true that they had powers
not common to most persons.
|
|
Sya y
naglálakàd na isa ŋ gabì sa isà ŋ
lugàr na madilìm 10at
pinagkàkatakutàn, sapagkàt díto y
marámi ŋ nakàkíta naŋ matandá sa
punsò.
|
One night he walked about in a dark and haunted place,
because he had heard that many people had there seen an old man of the
ant-hill.
|
|
Aŋ tabáko
naŋ matanda ŋ itò y nakatàtákot aŋ
lakì, at kuŋ itò y
hititin nyà aŋ liwánag na
naŋyàyári ay pára ŋ liwánag
naŋ isà ŋ sigàʾ.
|
The cigar of such an old man is of terrifying size, and
when he draws at it, the light given forth is like the light of a
bonfire.
|
|
15Sa gabi ŋ iyòn sa kanyà ŋ
paglalakàd maláyù pa syà y
nakàkíta na syà
naŋ isà ŋ liyàb. Aŋ buhuk nyà y
nagsitindìg at inakálà nya ŋ bumalìk,
dátapuwat nàpigílan nya aŋ kanyà
ŋ tákot at
ipinatúloy din nyà aŋ kanya ŋ
paglákad.
|
On this night he had gone some distance on his ramble,
when he saw a flare of light. His hair stood on end and he thought of
going back, but he overcame his fear and continued on his
walk.
|
|
Sya y
sinalúboŋ naŋ nagtàtabáko.
Pagkálapit nya y inanínaw 20nya aŋ katawàn naŋ matandà
ŋ iyòn, dátapuwat hindí rin nasyahàn aŋ kanya ŋ
pagsisyásat, kanya iníbig nya ŋ màkíta
sa síkat naŋ áraw
aŋ matandà ŋ iyòn. Úpaŋ itù
y maŋyári dápat nya
ŋ pigílin aŋ matandàʾ, sapagkàt
aŋ maŋa ispíritu ŋ itò ay bumábalik sa kanilà ŋ
tàhánan sa impyèrno o iba pa mà ŋ
lugàr 25sa paglápit naŋ umága.
|
He was met by the smoker. When he approached, Pedro
examined the old man’s figure, but as he did not succeed in
gratifying his curiosity, he was taken with the desire of seeing the
old man by daylight. To bring this about, he would have to hold the old
man fast, for these spirits return to their abode in Hell or some other
place of the kind as soon as morning comes.
|
|
Kanyàʾ
aŋ ginawá nya y hinawákan nya agàd aŋ
matandàʾ. Ito y
nakipagbunò sa kanyà. Kuŋ mínsan sya y
nása ilálim, kuŋ mínsan sya y nása ibábaw,
dátapwat hindí nya pinakawalàn aŋ matandàʾ. Mahigpìt na
mahigpìt aŋ kanya ŋ kápit at tinalaga 30nyà
ŋ sumáma káhit na saàn sya dalhìn
naŋ matandà kuŋ itò y malakàs káy
sa kanyà.
|
Therefore what he did was suddenly to seize hold of the
old man. The latter began to wrestle with him. Sometimes Pedro was
below, sometimes he was on top, but he did not let go of the old man.
He held him as tightly as possible and made up his mind that he would
follow no matter where the old man bore him, should the latter prove
stronger than he.
|
|
Silà y
nagbunò haŋgàŋ alastrès. Si Pédro
sa óras na itò ay pagòd na pagod nà at malakì aŋ
paŋlalatàʾ, dátapuwat hindí rin nya binitáwan aŋ kanyà
ŋ kabunòʾ. Naŋ magàalaskwàtru
nà ay 35naglubày naŋ pagkílos aŋ
kanya ŋ háwak. Naŋ makaraàn aŋ kalaháti-ŋ-óras aŋ
sínag naŋ áraw ay nagumpisa nà naŋ
pagtaŋlàw sa
kanilà, dátapuwat hindí pa rìn lubhà
ŋ maliwánag úpaŋ màpagkilála ni Pédro
kuŋ anò aŋ kanyà ŋ táŋan.
Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ alasìŋko ay malaki
nyà ŋ pagkámaŋhaʾ, naŋ
màkíta 40nya ŋ sya y nààákap sa
isà ŋ halígi ŋ hindí lubhà ŋ
mataàs káy sa
kanyà, dátapuwat nàtùtúlus sa
lúpà at sunòg na sunòg.
|
They wrestled till three o’clock. By this time
Pedro was as tired as can be and ready to sink to the ground, but he
did not let go of his fellow-wrestler. When four o’clock came his
opponent ceased to move. When another half hour had passed, the rays of
the sun began to fall upon them, but it was not yet light enough for
Pedro to make out what sort of thing it was he had hold of. When five
o’clock came, he was greatly surprised to see that he was
embracing a post which was not much higher than he. It was, however,
firmly fixed in the ground and completely charred.
|
|
19. Aŋ tiyának ni Hwàn.
|
19. Juan’s
goblin.
|
|
Isa ŋ
gabè si Hwàn ay tumawìd sa ílog sa kanya
ŋ paglilibòt. Naŋ sya y
nása pasígan pa lámaŋ, nakáramdam
syà naŋ sábuy naŋ buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd,
naŋ sya y mátuntuŋ nà sa 5kabuhaŋínan.
Naŋ úna
ŋ gabè itò y hindí nya ininò. Naŋ
ikalawà ŋ gabè, naŋ magdaàn sya ŋ ulè sa
pasíga ŋ itò, nakáramdam sya ŋ
mulí naŋ sábuy
naŋ buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd.
Inakálà nya ŋ subúkan at hulíhin aŋ nagsàsábuy sa
kanyà naŋ buháŋin, kanyàʾ sa 10kanya ŋ
paglákad ay pamínsan-mínsan sya ŋ
pumìpíhit na pabiglàʾ sa kanya ŋ likuràn, dátapwat
walá sya ŋ màkíta káhit na
anò.
|
One night Juan while rambling about, crossed a
river. While he was still on the bank and just walking on the sandy
beach, he felt some sand being showered on his back. He thought he
would watch for the person who was throwing sand on him and catch him,
so, while walking, he kept turning suddenly right about at short
intervals, but he saw nothing.
|
|
Dáhil díto y siniglàn siya
naŋ kaunti ŋ tákot at inakálà nya ŋ baká kuŋ anù
ŋ matandá sa punsò o tiyának aŋ kanya
ŋ nàkàkatúŋo. 15Kanyáʾ tinulínan nya aŋ
pagtakbò, dátapuwat hábaŋ nagtùtúlin sya ay lálu
namà ŋ dumádalas aŋ pagdápù
naŋ buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd.
Lumakì aŋ kanya ŋ tákot at dáhil
díto y bumalik syà sa
kanya ŋ báhay na patakbò naŋ
úbus-lakàs.
|
This frightened him a little, and he began to wonder if
he was not perhaps dealing with some old man of the ant-hill or some
goblin. Therefore he hastened his running, but the faster he went, the
more frequent grew the striking of sand on his back. His fear increased
and he returned home running with all his might.
|
|
Naŋ
dumatìŋ sya doòn ay hinàhábul nya
aŋ kanya ŋ hiniŋà 20at hindí sya
makaúsap. Naŋ sya y makapaghiŋa nà naŋ
kauntèʾ ay saká pa
lámaŋ sya nakasagòt sa marámi ŋ
maŋa tanòŋ naŋ kanya ŋ amà at iba pà ŋ
kasa-ŋ-bahày. Sinábi nya sa kanya ŋ amà na sya y sinùsundàn
naŋ maŋa dwènde sa kanya ŋ paglalakàd
at sinàsabúyan sya
naŋ buháŋin.
|
When he got there he was out of breath and unable to
speak. It was only when he had rested a while that he was able to
answer the many questions of his father and the other members of the
household. He told his father that he had been pursued by dwarves on
his walk and showered with sand.
|
|
25Itinanòŋ
naŋ kanya ŋ amà kuŋ saàn aŋ
lugàr na iyòn at sinábi nya ŋ sa pasígan naŋ
ílog. Aŋ kanya ŋ amà ay
nápahalakhàk naŋ
táwa at sinábi nya ŋ iyòn ay hindí
dwènde, dátapuwat aŋ kanyà lámaŋ paà aŋ
nagtátaŋày naŋ buháŋin sa kanya
ŋ likòd sa báwat
kanya ŋ paghakbàŋ.
|
His father asked him where the scene of this was, and he
said on the bank of the river. His father burst into peals of laughter
and said that these were no dwarves, but only his own feet, which sent
the sand up on his back at every stride he made.
|
|
30Dátapuwat si
Hwàn ay áyaw maniwálaʾ at máy ila
ŋ áraw na hindí sya nanáog naŋ
báhay. Dáhil díto y iníbig naŋ kanya
ŋ amà na
màipakilála sa kanyà aŋ katotohánan
naŋ kanya ŋ sinábe, at isa ŋ gabè ay
sinábi nya kay Hwàn na sya y magpasyàl at magdaàn sa lugàr di ŋ
iyòn at sya y kanyà ŋ sàsamáhan.
|
But Juan refused to believe this, and for several days
he did not leave the house. His father therefore wanted to show him the
truth of what he had said, so one night he told Juan to go for a walk
to that same place, and he would accompany him.
|
|
35Pumáyag si
Hwàn at sila ŋ dalawà y naparoòn sa
pasígan. Naŋ
dumatìŋ na sila doòn ay nagpahúle aŋ ama
ni Hwàn. Naŋ itu namàn ay naglálakad
nà sa kabuhaŋínan at naŋ sya y
nakáramdam naŋ sábuy naŋ buháŋin sa
likòd, siniglàn sya ŋ mulí naŋ tákot at isinigàw nya sa kanya
ŋ amà na nagumpisa nà naŋ 40pagsábuy naŋ
buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd.
|
Juan consented and they both went to the river-bank.
When they got there, Juan’s father dropped behind. When Juan
walked on the sandy beach and felt the sprinkling of sand on his back,
he was again filled with terror and shouted to his father that they
were already starting to throw sand on his back.
|
|
Pinabalìk nya si
Hwàn at kanya ŋ pinalákad na mulèʾ.
Ŋayòn ay sinùsundan nyà sa likuràn.
Dáhil díto y nàkíta naŋ ama ni Hwàn na twì ŋ sya y
háhakbàŋ aŋ sinélas na soòt nya
ay nagtátaŋày
naŋ buháŋin, at sa pagaalsà nitò
naŋ paà aŋ buháŋi ŋ taŋày ay napàpasábuy sa
likòd ni Hwàn.
|
He made Juan come back and walk on again. This time he
followed at his back. Accordingly Juan’s father saw that every
time Juan took a step, the sandals he was wearing carried along some
sand, and when he raised his foot the sand thus carried along was
sprinkled on his back.
|
|
Aŋ ginawá
naŋ kanya ŋ amà ay ipinaalìs aŋ
soòt nya ŋ 5sinélas at pinalákad sya ŋ
mulìʾ. Ŋayòn, káhit na gáno
kaláyoʾ aŋ
lakáran ni Hwàn ay walá na sya ŋ
nàràramdamà ŋ sábuy naŋ
buháŋin sa kanya ŋ likòd.
|
His father now had him take off the sandals he was
wearing and made him walk on again. This time, no matter how much
ground Juan walked over, he felt no scattering of sand on his back.
|
|
Mulá noon ay
nawalàn sya naŋ tákot sa maŋa
matandàʾ, duwènde, asuwàŋ, at iba
pà ŋ pinagkàkatakutàn.
|
From this time on he had no more fear of old men,
dwarves, vampires, and other spooks.
|
|
1020. Si Hwà ŋ
maŋlilígaw.
|
20. Juan the suitor.
|
|
Aŋ
dalága ŋ si Maryà ay balíta naŋ
gandà sa kanya ŋ báriyo. Dátapuwat walà ŋ maŋlilígaw
sa kanyà, líban na lámaŋ kay Hwàn. Ŋúnit aŋ amà ni
Maryà ay malakì aŋ pagkáayaw kay Hwàn. Hindí
màkaúsap ni Hwàn aŋ nilìligáwan
kuŋ hindí palihìm, 15sapagkàt pag
nàláman naŋ amà ni Maryà, itò y
sinàsaktan silà
kápwaʾ sa pamamagítan naŋ
pamálòʾ. Kuŋ mìnsan at malakì
aŋ gálit naŋ
amà ay bambò aŋ ginàgámit nya kay
Hwàn, at sa ganitò y
malápit sya ŋ mabalían naŋ butò
káylan man at sila y màhúli sa paguúsap.
|
Young Maria was famed for beauty in her district.
She had no suitors, however, except only Juan. But Maria’s father
had a great dislike for Juan. Juan could converse with the girl he was
courting only in secret, for when Maria’s father knew of it, he
would punish them both with his stick.
Sometimes, when the father’s anger was great, he
used a club on Juan, so that he was in danger of getting his bones
broken whenever they were caught talking together.
|
|
20Isa ŋ gabì ŋ madilìm aŋ
amà ni Mariyà ay naglibòt. Naŋ itò y màláman ni Hwàn
pinarunàn nya si Mariyà úpaŋ kausápin.
Nalibàŋ sila sa
paguúsap, kanyá sila y dinatnàn naŋ
amà ni Maryà sa kanya
ŋ pagwèʾ.
|
One dark night Maria’s father had gone out. When
Juan found this out, he went to Maria’s to talk with her. They
forgot themselves in their conversation, and so were surprised by
Maria’s father on his return.
|
|
Siniglàn sya
agàd naŋ gálit at pasigàw nya ŋ
kinaúsap si 25Hwàn: “Anu kà, salbáhe?
Sinábi ku nà sa iyò ŋ hwag kà ŋ
tútuntoŋ díto sa
áki ŋ pamamáhay. Ano aŋ íbig mo t
nàrìrito kà?”
|
He was at once filled with anger and in a loud voice
addressed Juan: “What do you want, you brute? I’ve told you
not to set foot in my house here. What do you mean by coming
here?”
|
|
At pagkasábe
nitò y sinuŋgabàn nya aŋ isa ŋ
bisìg naŋ kawáyan at inakmaàn nya ŋ bambuhìn si
Hwàn. Sa malaki ŋ tákot 30nitò ay
nagtalòn sya sa bintánàʾ, dátapuwat
sinundàn din syà naŋ amà. Kanyá
aŋ ginawá nya y tumakbò sya naŋ
úbus-lakàs.
|
And when he had said this he seized a bamboo cane and
made ready to give Juan a caning. In his terror the latter jumped out
of the window, but he was followed by the father. So he took to running
with all his might.
|
|
Aŋ gabì ay
madilìm na pára ŋ úliŋ, at hindí
nya màtumpakàn kuŋ saàn aŋ
parunàn, dátapuwat patúloy rin sya naŋ
pagtakbò. Nagkaŋdadápà sya sa pagtakbò,
dátapwat maligsi syà ŋ 35nagbàbáŋon at patúluy din
sa pagtakbò.
|
The night was dark as coal and he could not make out
which way to go, but he kept running nevertheless. He fell on his face
again and again as he ran, but he got up quickly and kept on
running.
|
|
Hindí
naláon at nakádaan sya naŋ isà ŋ
malakì at maitìm na
bágay. Nàkilála nya ŋ iyòn ay isa
ŋ kalabàw, kanyá sya y lumundàg agàd sa likòd nitò,
at kanya ŋ pinatakbò.
|
It was not long before he came upon a large black
object. He recognized it as a carabao, so he leaped quickly on its back and
made it run.
|
|
Aŋ pagsakày
sa kalabàw ay hindí lubhà ŋ mahírap sa
kalapáran 40naŋ likòd nitò at sa
kahináan naŋ takbò. Kanyàʾ, káhit
na walà
ŋ pamitìk si Hwàn ay dí natákot na
sumakày. Sa kadilimàn naŋ gabì sa kanya ŋ pagsakày ay
naŋyári ŋ náharap sya sa buntútan naŋ kalabàw at hindí sa
uluhàn.
|
Riding on a carabao is not very difficult, owing to the
breadth of its back and the slowness of its pace. Therefore, even
though he had no reins, Juan was not afraid to ride. Owing to the
darkness of the night it happened that in his mounting he faced the
tail-end of the carabao and not the head.
|
|
Pinatúlin nya
aŋ kalabàw. Naŋyári namà ŋ aŋ
kalabàw na 5itò ay árì naŋ amà
ni Maryà. Hindí nalaúnan at nakátanaw sya
naŋ báhay na maílaw
sa pinatùtuŋúhan naŋ kalabàw. Aŋ
boò ŋ ása nyà
aŋ báhay na iyòn ay sa kanya ŋ
kápit-báhay. Kanyá bumabá sya sa kalabàw at patakbo syà
ŋ pumanhìk sa báhay.
|
He urged on the carabao. Now it happened that this
carabao was owned by Maria’s
father. It was not long before Juan saw a lighted house in the
direction toward which the carabao was going. He confidently expected
that this house was his neighbor’s. Therefore he got down from
the carabao and went up into the house on the
run.
|
|
Malakì aŋ
nagìŋ pagkalitò nya at pagkatákot naŋ
pagkápanhik 10nya y sinalúboŋ sya naŋ amà
ni Maryà, at binambò sya sa katawàn at sinábi: “Anò t
nagbalìk ka pà? Hindí ba pinaláyas na kità, wala ŋ hyàʾ?”
|
Great was his surprise and terror when, upon entering,
he was met by Maria’s father and beaten all over his body and
addressed: “What have you come back for? Haven’t I got rid
of you yet, you shameless rascal?”
|
|
Naŋ
pagsa-ulàn si Hwàn naŋ kanya ŋ saríli ay
nagtalòn sya sa batalàn
at tumakbò sya ŋ mulí patúŋo sa kanya
ŋ báhay, 15dátapuwat
ŋayò y hindí na sya sumakày sa káhit
anò pa màn.
|
When Juan came to himself he jumped from the porch and
ran toward home, but this time he did not ride on anything.
|
|
21. Si Mariyà
ŋ marámot.
|
21. Maria the miser.
|
|
Naŋ
nabùbúhay pa si Mariyà ay nátira syà
sa kanya ŋ maínam na
báhay sa gitná naŋ isa ŋ maláwak na
bakúran na may magagandà
ŋ hardìn at maŋa púnu-ŋ-káhoy. Sya
y lubhà ŋ mayáman, 20kanyàʾ aŋ
búhay nya y isa ŋ panày na kaginhawáhan.
|
When Maria was still alive, she lived in her
pleasant house in the middle of wide grounds with beautiful gardens and
trees. As she was very rich, her life was one constant pleasure.
|
|
Hindí sya nakaratìŋ naŋ
ápat na pu ŋ taòn sa gúlaŋ at sya y namatày. Aŋ lahàt
naŋ kanya ŋ yáman ay hinátì nya sa kanya
ŋ kapatìd at sa
simbáhan. Hindí nya nàalaála aŋ
mahihírap nya ŋ kakilála at ilà ŋ
kápit-báhay.
|
She had not reached the age of forty years, when she
died. All her wealth she divided between her sister and the church. She
did not remember the poor acquaintances and those of her neighbors who
were poor.
|
|
25Aŋ kapatìd na naíwan ay
nagpamísa naŋ sunòd-sunòd sa loòb naŋ pito ŋ áraw,
úpaŋ aŋ káluluwa ni Mariyà ay
papasúkin ni Sam-Pédro
sa pintúan naŋ láŋit.
|
The sister who was left had a series of masses said
during the seven days after death, so that Maria’s soul might be
admitted by Saint Peter at the gates of heaven.
|
|
Naŋ aŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd ay
nabùbúhay pa itò y balíta ŋ balítà sa karamútan.
Siya mìsmo ay bihíra ŋ magpamísa o
magpatúlos 30naŋ kandílaʾ. Aŋ maŋa
pulúbi ŋ nagpàpalimòs, kuŋ tumáwag sa kanyà, ay
pinalàláyas nya at hindí
nilìlimusàn. Kadalasàn ay ipinahàhábul pa nyà sa áso.
Aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa kasamà ay pinapagtàtrabáho nya naŋ walà
ŋ úpa, at kuŋ kanya ŋ pakánin, ay wala ŋ
úlam,—asìn at kánin lámaŋ. Sa
panunúyo sa kanyà 35naŋ kanya ŋ
maŋa kasamà, twi ŋ silà y
nagsìsiuwèʾ ay nagdádala sila naŋ maŋa manòk, itlòg,
biìk, at maŋa búŋa naŋ gúlay o
haláman, úpaŋ
ibigày kay Maryà. Aŋ maŋa alaála ŋ
itò ay hindí nila
ibiníbigay dahilàn sa kanilà ŋ
pagmamahàl kay Maryà, dátapwat pára ŋ isa ŋ súhol,
úpaŋ sila y hwag masiyádu ŋ alipustaìn
40sa
kanilà ŋ pagparoòn sa kanya ŋ báhay.
Kuŋ si Maryà namàn ay lumálabas sa búkid sa kanya ŋ
maŋa kasamà, aŋ báwat màkíta
nya sa pamamáhay nila na kanya
ŋ màgustuhàn ay kinùkúha nya naŋ wala ŋ kibòʾ at
hindí nya binàbayáran. Kuŋ halimbáwa y
makàkíta sya sa kanya
ŋ maŋa kasamà naŋ isà ŋ bágu
ŋ yári ŋ 5bákol, biláo, bistày,
bayòŋ, banìg, palayòk, lumbò,
sandòk, kalàn, o iba
pà ŋ kasaŋkápan sa báhay, ay
kinùkúha nyà at ipinadádala nyà sa kanya ŋ báhay. Kuŋ
hindí nya magámit aŋ maŋa pinagkúkuha
nyà ay ipinagbíbili
nyà. Gayon dìn aŋ gawá nya sa maŋa
háyop naŋ kanya ŋ
maŋa kasamà. Dáhil díto y yumáman sya
ŋ 10agàd.
|
When her sister Maria was still alive, she was known far
and wide for her avarice. She herself rarely had masses said or made
offerings of candles. When beggars asking for alms called on her, she
had them driven away and gave them no alms. Often also she had them
chased with dogs. She forced her peons to work without pay, and when
she gave them rations it was without meat or vegetables,—only
boiled rice with salt. To propitiate her, her peons, whenever they went
home, brought chickens, eggs, young pigs, and vegetables or fruits to
give to Maria. They did not make these presents for love of Maria, but
as a kind of bribe, so that they might not be too harshly treated
during their stay in her house. But when Maria went to the country to
her workmen, she appropriated without saying a word and without paying
for it, everything she saw in their house that took her fancy. When,
for instance, she saw at her workmen’s a new basket, tray, sieve,
sack, mat, pot, cup, dipper, brazier, or other household
utensil, she took it and carried it off to her house. When she could
not make use of the things she had taken, she sold them. She acted in
the same way about animals that belonged to her servants. In this way
she had quickly grown rich.
|
|
Naŋ sya y
máy-roon nà ŋ tatlu ŋ áraw na
namámatày, aŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd ay
nàròroòn sa kanyà ŋ báhay at
doòn nagpàpalípas naŋ pagdadalamháteʾ. Isa ŋ
hápun naŋ sya y naglálakad sa hàlamanàn, nátabi syà sa
balòn na nása bakúran. Nàpagúlat
15sya, sapagkàt sa ilálim
naŋ balòn ay may nárinig syà ŋ
tumàtáwag sa kanya
ŋ paŋálan. Itinuŋu nyà aŋ kanya
ŋ úlo sa balòn at doòn ay lálu ŋ
nárinig nyà ŋ mabúte aŋ pagtáwag,
dátapuwat walá sya ŋ màkíta ŋ
táo na káhit anò.
|
When she had been dead about three days, her sister was
at her house, spending the period of mourning. One evening, when she
was walking in the garden she came to the side of a well that was in
the yard. She was surprised, for from the depth of the well she heard
someone calling her name. She turned her head toward the well and there
she again clearly heard the calling, although she could see nobody
whatever.
|
|
Sinábi naŋ
bóses: “Áki ŋ kapatìd, akò ay si
Mariyà. Aŋ 20ginawá ku ŋ pamumúhay na
karamútan, kasakimàn, at kalupitàn ay áki ŋ pinagbàbayáran
ŋayòn. Akò ay nàrìrinè sa
pàrusahàn ni
Bathálà sa lahàt naŋ makasalánan.
Kuŋ maàárì ay hwàg mu akò ŋ tuláran, at ikaw sána
y humánap naŋ paraàn úpaŋ
maháŋo mo akò
díto sa kumúkulu ŋ laŋìs na áki
ŋ tìráhan ŋayòn.”
|
The voice said: “My sister, I am Maria. I am
paying now for my life of avarice, selfishness and cruelty. I am here
in the Lord’s place of punishment for all sinners. If it may be,
do not follow my example, but seek some means to save me from the
boiling oil here which is now my place of dwelling.”
|
|
25Aŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd ay lubhà
ŋ malakì aŋ nagìŋ pagkahápis,
at sya y naparoòn agàd
sa páreʾ, úpaŋ ipagtanòŋ kuŋ
papáno aŋ paraà
ŋ magágawà nyà úpaŋ
maháŋo nya sa infyèrno aŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd. Ipináyo
naŋ páriʾ na sya y magsadyá sa isa ŋ
báyan na máy-roo ŋ
laráwan ni Sam-Pédro na milagróso. Aŋ
laráwa ŋ 30itò ni Sam-Pédro ay
nakìkipagúsap sa maŋa táo at
naghàhátol naŋ
sarì-sári ŋ paraàn úpaŋ
makapások sa láŋit. Iyùn aŋ kanya ŋ milágro.
|
Her sister was much grieved then and went at once to the
priest to ask to what means she could resort to rescue her sister from
Hell. The priest advised her to go to a certain town where there was a
wonder-working image of Saint Peter. This image of Saint Peter talked
with people and advised various means of getting into Heaven. This was
its miracle.
|
|
Aŋ kapatìd
ni Maryà ay nagsadyá agad-agàd sa báya
ŋ kinàdòroonàn naŋ Sam-Pédro
ŋ milagróso. Naŋ dumatìŋ sya roòn
at 35nakìkipagúsap na syà kay
Sam-Pédro, sinábi nya aŋ lahàt-lahàt.
Sinábi nya ŋ aŋ
sábi sa kanyà naŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd
ay aŋ kanya ŋ ginawà ŋ karamútan,
kasakimàn, at kalupitàn ay sya nyà ŋ ikinahúlog sa infyèrno.
|
Maria’s sister went immediately to the town where
stood the miraculous Saint Peter. When she got there and talked with
Saint Peter, she told him the whole story. She said that her sister had
told her that her avarice, selfishness, and cruelty had caused her to
be thrown into Hell.
|
|
“Kuŋ
gayòn,” aŋ wíkà ni Sam-Pédro,
“humánap ka naŋ 40káhit íisa
ŋ táo, háyop, o haláman na ginawaàn naŋ
iyo ŋ kapatìd naŋ
isà ŋ kabàítan. Kuŋ ikàw ay
makàkíta nà, bumalik kà ŋ mulí sa ákin, at
bìbigyàn kità naŋ paraà ŋ
ikahàháŋo mo sa hírap sa iyo ŋ
kapatìd.”
|
“In that case,” said Saint Peter,
“find you but one single person, animal, or plant that was the
object of an act of kindness on the part of your sister. When you have
managed to find it, come back to me, and I shall give you a means to
rescue your sister from damnation.”
|
|
Aŋ kapatìd ni Maryà ay umuwí
agàd sa kanila ŋ báyan, at díto y nagusísà sya sa
lahàt naŋ namàmáyan kuŋ síno
aŋ may útaŋ na
loòb sa kanya ŋ kapatìd o kayá kuŋ
síno aŋ kanya ŋ ginawàn o pinagsalitaàn naŋ
mabúti. Dátapuwat káhit isà ay walà ŋ makasagòt. Aŋ
maŋa háyop namàn sa maŋa
kápit-báhay 5at sa bakúran ni Maryà aŋ kanya
ŋ pinagusisàʾ, dátapuwat walá rin
syà ŋ nàkíta na ginawaàn naŋ
mabúti naŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd.
|
Maria’s sister went home to their town at once and
there she inquired of all the townspeople which of them owed any debt
of gratitude to her sister, or which of them had been well treated or
kindly spoken to by her. But not one of them was able to answer. The
animals also of the neighbors and on Maria’s own grounds were
interrogated by her, but here she found none that had been done a
kindness by her sister.
|
|
Aŋ isa ŋ áso ŋ buto t balàt
ay nagsábi sa kanyà: “Isa ŋ hápon akò y gutòm na
gutòm. Nakádaan akò sa kanyà ŋ
bakúran naŋ isa ŋ
butò. Itò y kinagat kò at áki ŋ
dinádala, naŋ màkíta 10nya akò.
Ipinahábol nya akò ŋ agàd, at naŋ
bitíwan ko aŋ butò itò y ipinabaon nyà
sa lúpaʾ. Iyan bà y isa ŋ
kabàítan?”
|
One dog, a creature of skin and bones, said to her:
“One afternoon I was very hungry. I found a bone in her yard. I
seized it and was carrying it off, when she saw me. She had me chased
at once, and when I dropped the bone she had it buried in the ground.
Was that an act of kindness?”
|
|
Lálu ŋ
lumakì aŋ hápis naŋ kapatìd ni
Mariyà at untì-untì ŋ nawáwalà aŋ kanya ŋ
pagása na maháŋo sa hírap aŋ kanya
ŋ kapatìd. Inumpisahan
nyà ŋ usisáin aŋ maŋa haláman sa
bakúran 15naŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd.
Inisa-isà nya ŋ lahàt aŋ maŋa
kalabása, úpo,
pipíno, síle, milòn, siŋkamàs,
manèʾ, talòŋ, sítaw, at sibúyas, báwaŋ, at iba pà
ŋ gúlay. Sa kanilà y walá sya ŋ
nàkíta naŋ kanya
ŋ hinàhánap. Isinunòd namàn nyà
aŋ maŋa púno-ŋ-káhoy. Siniyásat nya isà-isà aŋ
maŋa púnò naŋ síko, anúnas,
20átis, mabúlo,
súhàʾ, dalandàn, dáyap, at
balúbad. Ŋúnit walá ri ŋ nagìŋ katuturàn aŋ kanya
ŋ págod; íisa na lámaŋ
paŋkàt naŋ maŋa
haláman aŋ hindí pa nya
naùusísaʾ, at kuŋ díto y hindí
sya makàkíta naŋ
kanya ŋ hánap, ay walá sya ŋ
magágawà sa pagdudúsa naŋ kanya ŋ kapatìd. Nalíbot nya
sila ŋ lahàt, dátapuwat 25walà ŋ
nakapagsábi na tumaŋgàp sila naŋ isà
ŋ gawà ŋ kabàítan sa kay
Maryà.
|
The grief of Maria’s sister became much greater,
and her hope of rescuing her sister from damnation was gradually
failing. She began to question the plants in her sister’s yard.
She took one by one all the gourds, pumpkins, cucumbers, chile peppers,
melons, sincamas, peanuts, egg-plants, cow-peas, and onions and garlic,
and other vegetables. She did not find among them that which she
sought. She also went through the trees. She made inquiry, one after
the other, of the chico, anona, custard-apple, mabolo, grape-fruit,
orange, lime, and casoy trees. But here too her labor gave no result;
only the group of the garden-plants she had not yet questioned, and if
here she did not find what she sought, there would be nothing for her
to do about the punishment her sister was undergoing. She went to them
all, but there were not any who could say that they had received any
kindness from Maria.
|
|
Sa
kàhuli-hulíhan pumaroòn aŋ kapatìd sa
tabì naŋ balòn, at doòn inusísà nya ŋ lahàt
aŋ maŋa damò. Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ
gabì ay íisa na
lámaŋ na púnu-ŋ-damò aŋ
hindí nya naùusísaʾ. Itò y 30nilapítan nya na punò ŋ
punú naŋ tákot at pagása.
|
At the very last the sister went to the side of the
well, and there she questioned all the blades of grass. When night came
there was only one head of grass which she had not yet questioned. Full
of fear and hope she approached it.
|
|
Itinanùŋ
nya sa púno naŋ damò na
nàtàtanìm sa tabì naŋ balòn:
“Naŋ nabùbúhay ba aŋ áki ŋ
kapatìd, ay ginawàn ka nyà naŋ isà
ŋ kabàítan?”
|
She asked the head of grass which grew by the side of
the well: “When my sister was alive, did she ever do you an act
of kindness?”
|
|
Isinagòt
naŋ damò: “Ó! Aŋ iyo bà ŋ
kapatìd? Siyà ŋàʾ, 35siyà aŋ
nagbigày sa ákin naŋ bágo ŋ
búhay. Noò ŋ tagáraw na nagdaàn, lantà ŋ lanta nà
aŋ áki ŋ maŋa dáhon at akò y
malápit na ŋ
mamatày, dátapuwat aŋ iyò ŋ
kapatìd ay nalígoʾ isa ŋ hápon sa tabì naŋ balo ŋ
itò. Sa kanya ŋ pagpalígoʾ ay nàwisikan
akò naŋ túbig at
dáhil díto y lumakàs ako ŋ mulìʾ,
at aŋ maŋa lantà 40ku ŋ dáhon ay
nanaríwa ŋ muliʾ.”
|
“Oh, your sister?” answered the grass,
“Yes, it was she who gave me new life. Last summer my blades were
all withered and I was near to dying, but your sister bathed one
evening by the side of this well. As she bathed, some water was
sprinkled on me, so that I grew again and my withered blades became
fresh once more.”
|
|
Wala ŋ
pagkàsyahàn aŋ nagiŋ tuwá naŋ
kapatìd ni Maryà, at sa gabì ri ŋ iyòn
ay nagbalìk sya kay Sam-Pédro. Binigyan syà ni Sam-Pédro naŋ isa ŋ
dàsálan, at sinábi sa kanyà na umuwé
sya at
iláwit nya sa balòn aŋ dàsála ŋ
iyòn. Tawágin nya si Maryà at pakapítin nya sa
dàsálan, at dáhil díto y
mahàháŋù nya sa hírap aŋ kanya
ŋ kapatìd.
|
Maria’s sister could not contain the joy which
arose in her, and that very night she returned to Saint Peter. Saint
Peter gave her a rosary and told her to go home and to hang this rosary
down into the well. She was to call Maria and let her take hold of the
rosary; by this means her sister could be rescued from damnation.
|
|
Nagbalìk sya
ŋ agàd at sumìsíkat pa lámaŋ
aŋ áraw naŋ sya 5y dumatìŋ sa
bakúran ni nasíra ŋ Maryà. Lumápit sya
sa balòn, inilawit nyà
aŋ dàsálan, at tináwag nya aŋ kanya
ŋ kapatìd. Itò y lumitàw sa ibábaw naŋ túbig at
humáwak sa dàsálan. Inumpisahàn naŋ kanyà ŋ kapatìd
aŋ paghátak sa dàsálan at sya y nátaas
nà
untì-untèʾ.
|
She went home at once, and hardly was the sun shining,
when she came to the yard of the deceased Maria. She approached the
well, let down the rosary, and called her sister. Maria emerged from
under the water and took hold of the rosary. Her sister began to pull
at the rosary and she was slowly lifted up.
|
|
10Sa pagháŋo ŋ itò sa
kanyà ay máy-roo ŋ ibà ŋ káluluwa
na íbig di ŋ
makaalìs sa infyèrno. Kanyá silà y
nagsikápit sa paà ni
Maryà, naŋ màkíta nilà na itò y
nahàháŋù sa hírap. Dátapuwat
naŋ aŋ paà ni
Maryà ay sya na lámaŋ nàlùlubòg
sa túbig aŋ ginawá
nya y ikinawàg nya aŋ dalawa ŋ paà,
úpaŋ aŋ maŋa káluluwa 15ŋ
nàkàkápit sa kanyà ay
maŋàkabitàw.
|
As she was thus being rescued, some other souls too
wanted to escape from Hell. So they all took hold of Maria’s
feet, when they saw that she was being rescued from damnation. But when
only Maria’s feet were still under water, she shook her two feet,
so that the souls who had hold of her should have to let go.
|
|
Naŋ itù y
gawin nyà ay napatìd aŋ dàsálan at
agad-agàd sya ŋ
lumubùg sa balòn, at mulá noon ay hindí
nà sya nàkaúsap naŋ kanya ŋ
kapatìd.
|
When she did this the rosary broke and she at once fell
into the well, and from that time on her sister was never again able to
communicate with her.
|
|
Bumalìk itò kay Sam-Pédro at
ibinalítaʾ aŋ naŋyáre, dátapuwat
20sinábe ni Sam-Pédro na
walá na sila ŋ magágawa úpaŋ
maháŋo sa infyèrno aŋ kanyà ŋ
kapatìd.
|
The sister went back to Saint Peter and told him what
had happened, but Saint Peter said that there was no longer anything
that they could do to save her sister from Hell.
|
|
22. Tatlò ŋ
káluluwa ŋ tumáwag kay Sam-Pédro.
|
22. Three souls who called
upon Saint Peter.
|
|
Si Hwàn ay
isa ŋ bágu ŋ táwu ŋ makísig.
Dátapuwat naŋ dumatìŋ sya sa gúlaŋ na dalawa
ŋ pù t dalawà, sya y nagkasakìt 25naŋ
malubhàʾ at dí nalaúnan at namatày
siyà. Aŋ kanya ŋ káluluwa ay naparoòn sa láŋit at tumuktòk
sa pintúan nitò.
|
Juan was a gay bachelor. But when he reached the
age of twenty-two he fell very sick and it was not long before he died.
His soul went to Heaven and knocked at its gate.
|
|
Si Sam-Pédro ay
sumagòt sa kanya ŋ pagtuktòk at itinanòŋ
nitò: “Sínu ka?
Anò aŋ sadyá mo ríto?”
|
Saint Peter answered his knock and asked: “Who are
you? What brings you here?”
|
|
Isinagòt naŋ káluluwa ni Hwàn:
“Akò aŋ káluluwa ni Hwàn. 30Buksan
mò aŋ pintòʾ, at íbig ko ŋ
pumások.”
|
Juan’s soul answered: “I am Juan’s
soul. Open the door, for I want to come in.”
|
|
Binuksàn
naŋ bantay-pintòʾ aŋ pintúan, at
bágu nya binayáa ŋ makapások aŋ
káluluwa ni Hwàn ay sinyásat múna nya
naŋ ganitò: “Ano
aŋ dáhil at naparíto ka? Ano aŋ
kabànála ŋ ginawá mo sa lúpaʾ at
nagakálà ka ŋ nàbàbágay sa
yò aŋ kaginhawáhan 35sa
láŋit? Ikàw bagà y may iníwa ŋ
asáwa?”
|
The door-keeper opened the gate, but before he allowed
Juan’s soul to enter, he questioned him as follows: “Why
have you come here? What acts of piety have you performed on earth that
you think you are entitled to the joys of Heaven? Have you left a wife
behind you?”
|
|
Aŋ káluluwa ni Hwàn ay
nagsábi: “Naŋ akò y nása
lúpà pa, madalàs
aku ŋ magsimbà, magdasàl, at maglimòs,
dátapuwat hindí ako
nagkapálad na magasáwa.”
|
Juan’s soul said: “When I was still on earth
I often went to church, prayed, and gave alms, but I did not have the
good fortune to get married.”
|
|
Isinagòt
naŋ bantay-pintòʾ: “Hindí ka dápat
magtamò naŋ 40kaginhawáhan sa láŋit.”
|
The door-keeper answered: “You are not fit to
partake of the joys of Heaven.”
|
|
At
pagkàsábi nya nitò ay isinara nyà aŋ
pintòʾ. Aŋ káluluwa ni Hwàn ay hindí nakapások sa
láŋit.
|
And when he had said this he closed the door.
Juan’s soul was not able to enter Heaven.
|
|
Pagkaalìs ni
Hwàn ay dumatìŋ namàn aŋ isa pa
rì ŋ káluluwa.
|
When Juan had gone away, another soul arrived.
|
|
5“Sínu ka? At
bákit mo gustò ŋ pumások sa
láŋit? Ikaw bà y
nagasáwa naŋ násàsa lúpà
pà?” aŋ maŋa tanùŋ naŋ
bantay-pintòʾ.
|
“Who are you? And why do you wish to come into
Heaven? Did you get married when you were still on earth?” asked
the door-keeper.
|
|
Isinagòt naŋ káluluwa:
“Akù y aŋ káluluwa niy Andrès.
Nagasáwa akò naŋ akò y násàsa
lúpà pa. Buksan mò aŋ pintòʾ
10at íbig ko ŋ
pumások.”
|
The soul answered: “I am the soul of
Andrés. I took a wife when I was yet on earth. Open the gate for
I want to come in.”
|
|
Agad-agàd na binuksàn ni Sam-Pédro
aŋ pintú naŋ láŋit at pagkàkíta nya sa káluluwa niy
Andrès ay sinábi nya: “Ó!
Kàwáwa ŋ
káluluwa! Sa maŋà gáya mo
nàtàtaàn at nàràrápat aŋ
maŋa kaginhawáhan sa láŋit. Pumásuk
ka!”
|
At once Saint Peter opened the gate of Heaven, and when
he saw the soul of Andrés he said: “Oh, pitiable soul! For
such as you the joys of Heaven are reserved and fitting.
Enter!”
|
|
15Aŋ káluluwa ni Andrès ay tuwa
ŋ twá at pumások sa masayà ŋ
tàhánan.
|
The soul of Andrés was overjoyed and entered the
abode of bliss.
|
|
Pagkásara
naŋ pintò ay máy-roon na namà ŋ
tumuktòk.
|
When the door was closed there was another knock.
|
|
“Sínu
ka?” aŋ tanoŋ ulí naŋ bantày.
|
“Who are you?” the keeper asked again.
|
|
“Akò y aŋ káluluwa ni
Mariyáno,” aŋ sagòt naŋ
tumuktòk.
|
“I am the soul of Mariano,” answered the one
who had knocked.
|
|
20“Bákit ka naparíto? Bákit
ka nagakála ŋ marápat ka ŋ magtamò
naŋ láŋit? Ikàw bagà y nagasáwa
naŋ násàsa lúpa ka pà?”
|
“Why have you come here? Why do you think that you
deserve to partake of Heaven? Did you get married when you were still
on earth?”
|
|
Sa maŋa tanùŋ na itò y
isinagòt naŋ káluluwa ni Mariyáno: “Naŋ akò y
násàsa lúpà pa madalàs akù
ŋ magpamísa. Aŋ kalahátì 25naŋ yáman
ko ay ibinigay kò sa simbáhan sa pagpapamísa
at maŋa pagpapatugtòg
naŋ kampánaʾ. Aŋ nàipatúlus
kò ŋ kandílà
ay hindí mahìhíla naŋ tatlò ŋ
kalabàw, at kuŋ sa pagaasáwa namàn,” idinugtuŋ nyà,
“akò y nagkaroòn naŋ dalawà. Nabáo akù at nagasáwa
ŋ mulìʾ.”
|
To these questions the soul of Mariano answered:
“When I was still on earth I often had masses said. Half of my
wealth I gave to the Church for the saying of masses and the ringing of
bells. The candles I offered up could not be drawn by three
carabao, and as to getting married,”
continued the soul, “I was married twice. I became a widower and
married again.”
|
|
30“Áki ŋ ikinalúluŋkot
aŋ hindí ko pagkaári ŋ papasúkin
kità. Aŋ maŋa
lóku ŋ gáya mo ay wala ŋ lugàr
díto sa kahariyàn naŋ láŋit.”
|
“I am very sorry that I am not able to let you in.
There is no place for madmen like you in the Kingdom of
Heaven.”
|
|
At isinara nyà aŋ pintòʾ.
|
And he closed the door.
|
|
23. Si Hwà ŋ baŋkéro.
|
23. Juan the canoer.
|
|
35Isa ŋ áraw isa ŋ
Kastílaʾ ay napatátawìd kay Hwàn sa
kanya ŋ baŋkàʾ
sa ibáyo naŋ ílog. Aŋ Kastíla ŋ
sakay nyà ay marúnuŋ magsalitá naŋ Tagálog.
Kanyàʾ, naŋ silà y
nàlàlayú na sa pasígan, ay nagumpisa syà naŋ pakikipagúsap
kay Hwàn.
|
One day a Spaniard was having Juan ferry him
across the river in his canoe. The Spaniard, Juan’s fare, was
able to speak Tagalog. Accordingly, while they were still far from
shore, he began a conversation with Juan.
|
|
Aŋ Kastíla
ŋ itò ay isa ŋ marúnoŋ na táo,
sigúro ŋ isa ŋ 40gurù ŋ
balítà sa Espánya, at itò y
nàpagkìkilála sa pagsasalitá nya kay Hwàn tuŋkùl sa
heyugrafíya, aritmétika, at iba t ibà ŋ
wíkà sa Ewrúpa.
|
This Spaniard was a learned man, no doubt a famous
scholar in Spain, and this showed itself in his discourse to Juan
regarding geography, arithmetic, and various languages of Europe.
|
|
Naŋ matápus
aŋ kanya ŋ pagsasalitàʾ, ay nagtanùŋ
syà kay Hwàn naŋ ganitò: “Ikàw
ba y nagáral naŋ hewgrafíya?”
|
When his discourse was ended, he asked Juan: “Have
you studied geography?”
|
|
5“Hindí pòʾ,” aŋ
sagòt ni Hwàn,—at katunáya y uwalà
ŋ mwàŋ si Hwàn,
sapagkàt sya y lumakì sa hírap at sa gayò y
panày na pagtatrabáho
lámaŋ aŋ pinagdàdaanan nyà ŋ
búhay.
|
“No, sir,” answered Juan,—and in
truth, Juan had no education, for he had grown up in poverty, so that
his life at all times was nothing but ceaseless work.
|
|
Aŋ Kastílà ay nàpagúlat
sa sagòt ni Hwàn at sinábe niya ŋ agàd: “Dináramdam ko,
kaybígan, aŋ hindí mu pagkáalam 10naŋ
hewgrafíya, sapagkàt dáhil díto y
pára ŋ nawalàʾ aŋ kalahátì
naŋ iyo ŋ búhay.”
|
The Spaniard was astonished at Juan’s answer and
said at once: “I am sorry, friend, that you do not know
geography, for in consequence half your life, as it were, is
lost.”
|
|
Si Hwàn ay
hindí kumibòʾ at patúluy dìn aŋ
pagsagwàn.
|
Juan did not utter a word, and kept on paddling.
|
|
Hindí
nalaúnan at tumanùŋ namàn aŋ
Kastílaʾ: “Nagáral ka bà naŋ
aritmétika?”
|
It was not long before the Spaniard again asked:
“Have you studied arithmetic?”
|
|
15“Hindí
pòʾ,” aŋ sagòt ni Hwàn.
|
“No, sir,” answered Juan.
|
|
“Kuŋ
gayòn, kaybígan, ay pára ŋ nawalá sa
iyò aŋ ikápat na
baháge naŋ iyo ŋ búhay.”
|
“If that is the case, friend, a fourth of your
life is lost to you, as it were.”
|
|
Si Hwàn ay natákot naŋ
kauntìʾ, sapagkàt hindí nya
màpagkúro aŋ íbig sabíhin naŋ
Kastílaʾ.
|
Juan became a little frightened, for he could not make
out what the Spaniard was trying to say.
|
|
20Sinábi nya sa
kanya ŋ saríli: “Kàwáwà ka,
Hwàn, walá nà ŋ nàtìtirà naŋ iyu ŋ
búhay, kuŋ hindí isa ŋ ikápat na
partè lámaŋ.”
|
He said to himself: “You poor fellow, Juan, only a
fourth of your life is left now.”
|
|
Naŋ aŋ baŋká nila ay
násàsa malálim na lugàr na naŋ
ílog, at hábaŋ
aŋ Kastílà namàn ay pinagkùkúro
aŋ malakì ŋ kamaŋmaŋàn 25naŋ maŋa
táo ŋ trabahadùr sa Filipínas, si Hwàn
ay tumanùŋ naŋ ganitò sa kanya ŋ
sakày: “Marúnoŋ pú ba kayo ŋ
lumaŋòy?”
|
When their canoe had got to a deep part of the river,
and while the Spaniard was reflecting upon the great ignorance of the
working people in the Philippines, Juan asked his passenger this
question: “Do you know how to swim, sir?”
|
|
“Hindìʾ!” aŋ sagut
agàd naŋ Kastílaʾ.
|
“No,” answered the Spaniard at once.
|
|
“Kuŋ gayòn,” aŋ sagot ni
Hwàn, “ay hindí lámaŋ pára
30kayù ŋ nawalàn naŋ
boò ŋ inyo ŋ búhay, dátapwat
nawalá na ŋà ŋ
túnay.”
|
“In that case,” answered Juan, “you
have lost your whole life, not only as it were, but you have lost it in
all truth.”
|
|
At sinabayàn nya
itù naŋ pagtataòb naŋ baŋkà ŋ
sinàsakyan nilà. Si
Hwàn ay lumaŋùy sa pasígan at aŋ
Kastílà namàn ay tinaŋày naŋ ágos.
|
And while he spoke these words he tipped over the canoe
they were riding in. Juan swam to the shore, but the Spaniard was
carried away by the stream.
|
|
3524. Aŋ kabàítan sa maŋa
háyop.
|
24. Kindness to
animals.
|
|
Isà ŋ
gabì ŋ madilìm ay naglálakad si Hwàn
sa maŋa kaparáŋa ŋ malaláyoʾ sa maŋa báyan.
Sya y patúŋo sa kanya ŋ báyan. Bágu sya makaratìŋ
díto ay kinàkayiláŋa ŋ magdaàn
sya sa maŋa ilàŋ na lugàr.
40Isa ŋ gabì na sya y naglálakad sa
ganitò ŋ lugàr biglá sya ŋ nàpagúlat sa
pagdatìŋ naŋ isa ŋ púsa ŋ itìm
na humúni at kinámot
aŋ kanya ŋ paà. Aŋ ginawá nya y
úbus-lakàs nya ŋ sinípa aŋ púsaʾ, at itò y
nàpahitsà naŋ maláyoʾ. Ipinatúluy
nya aŋ paglalakàd,
dátapuwat hindí nalaúnan at nagbalìk na
namàn 5sa kanyà aŋ
púsaʾ. Lálu ŋ lumakì aŋ kanya
ŋ gálit at sinípà nya ŋ mulìʾ aŋ púsaʾ.
Inakálà nya ŋ aŋ púsa ŋ iyòn
ay isà ŋ laruwàn naŋ tyának o
asuwàŋ. Ipinatúluy nya aŋ paglákad.
Hindí naluwatàn at aŋ
púsa ŋ itèm ay nagbalìk na mulí sa
kanyà. Ŋayòn, sa
lugàr naŋ sipáin nya aŋ púsaʾ,
itò y hinawákan nyà 10at dinala nyà sa
kanya ŋ bisìg, kanya ŋ hinagòd, at
pinagtátapìk, at
sinábi nya sa púsaʾ: “Mabaìt na
púsàʾ, anò aŋ gusto mò? Sàsáma ka ba sa áki
ŋ paglalakàd?” at ipinatúluy nyà
aŋ kanyà ŋ paglákad.
|
One dark night Juan was walking in some forests
far from any towns. He was on his way to his home town. Before he could
arrive there, he had to pass through some uncanny places. One night,
when he was walking in such a place, he was suddenly startled by the
arrival of a black cat which purred and scratched at his leg. What he
did was to kick the cat with all his might, and it was
tossed a good distance. He kept on walking, but it was not long before
the cat came back to him. His anger greatly increased, and he kicked
the cat again. He thought that this cat was the plaything of some
goblin or vampire. He kept on walking. It was not long before the black
cat again came back to him. This time, instead of kicking the cat, he
took hold of it, lifted it up on his arm, stroked it and patted it, and
said to it: “Good little cat, what do you want? Are you going to
come along with me on my journey?” and he continued walking.
|
|
Hindí
nalaúnan at sya y sinumpòŋ naŋ antòk. Sa
daàn ay 15máy
nàkíta sya ŋ isa ŋ báhay,
dátapuwat aŋ maŋa táo sa báyan ay may paniwála ŋ
iŋkantádo aŋ báhay na iyòn.
Dátapuwat walà ŋ
iba ŋ màtulúgan si Hwàn, kaniyàʾ
aŋ ginawá nya y pumanhik syà sa báhay úpaŋ doòn
matúlog.
|
After a while he was attacked by sleepiness. He saw a
house by the way, but the people in his town believed that this house
was enchanted. However, Juan had no other place to sleep, so he entered
the house to sleep there.
|
|
Sya y
náhimbìŋ, dátapuwat naŋ
naghàháti-ŋ-gabi nà ay 20nágisiŋ sya sa
kàluskúsan naŋ maŋa dagàʾ. Aŋ
ginawá nya y pinagsisipá
nya at pinagdadagukàn aŋ
maŋa dagàʾ úpaŋ kanya ŋ patayìn o kayà y
palayásin. Dátapuwat aŋ maŋa dagàʾ
ay dumámi naŋ
dumámi haŋgàŋ sa napunòʾ aŋ
kuwàrto at sya y kanilà ŋ pinagkakagàt.
|
He fell sound asleep, but at midnight he was awakened by
the pattering of rats. He set about kicking and striking at the rats to
kill them or drive them away. But the rats became more and more
numerous until the room became full and they bit him and gnawed at
him.
|
|
25Aŋ ginawá ni Hwàn ay
kinúha nya aŋ kanya ŋ púsa ŋ itìm
at sinábi nya ríto ŋ patain nyà aŋ
maŋa dagàʾ. Aŋ púsàʾ ay ŋumiyàw at inumpisahàn
aŋ paghábol sa maŋa dagàʾ. Malakì
aŋ nagìŋ tákot
naŋ maŋa dagàʾ, at aŋ maŋa hindí
nápatay naŋ púsa ay
nagsipagtakbò sa kaní-kanilà ŋ
luŋgàʾ. Naŋ màkíta ni Hwàn
30na
walá na ŋ nàtìtirà sa maŋa
dagà kuŋ hindí dádalawa lámaŋ,
ay pinapaghintú nya aŋ
púsaʾ. Kanya ŋ hinúli aŋ dalawa ŋ
dagàʾ at kanya ŋ
inámoʾ at inakálà nya ŋ isáma
rìn silà na gáya naŋ púsà sa
kanya ŋ paglalakàd.
|
It was then that Juan took his black cat and told it to
kill the rats. The cat miewed and began to chase the rats. Great fear
seized the rats, and those that were not killed by the cat ran to their
holes. When Juan saw that there were no rats left except only a single
pair, he stopped the cat. He caught the two rats and petted them and
decided to take them along on his journey, just like the cat.
|
|
Kinàbukásan ay ipinatúluy nya aŋ
kanya ŋ paglalakàd. Inabútan 35sya naŋ gabè sa isa ŋ lugàr
na wala ŋ báhay, kanyá aŋ ginawá nya y ipinatúluy nya aŋ
paglalakàd papuntà sa isa ŋ báhay na árì naŋ isa ŋ
matandàʾ. Nagkátaon namàn na aŋ matanda
ŋ itò y isà ŋ
eŋkantadòr. Pinatúluy nya si Hwàn at
pinatúlog nya sa isa ŋ
silìd. Si Hwàn ay natúlog naŋ walà
ŋ paghihinálà 40naŋ anu màn.
|
On the next day he continued his journey. He was
overtaken by night in a place where there were no houses, so he walked
on toward a house owned by a certain old man. Now it happened that this
old man was an enchanter. He took Juan in and gave him an alcove to
sleep in. Juan went to sleep without suspecting anything.
|
|
Dátapuwat, naŋ mágisiŋ
syà kinàbukásan, ay nàpagúlat sya
at natákot naŋ
màkíta nya ŋ sya y
nàkùkulòŋ sa isa ŋ kahòn na
walà ŋ
bùkásan. Pinagsipá nya aŋ maŋa
diŋdìŋ naŋ kahòn, dátapuwat
walá sya
ŋ magawàʾ, itò y hindí nya
mabuksàn. Malakì aŋ kanya ŋ
pagdadalamháteʾ at walá sya ŋ
màláma ŋ gawìn, naŋ màalaála nya ŋ sya y may kasáma
ŋ isà ŋ púsa at dalawà ŋ
dagá sa kanya ŋ
kùlúŋan. Kinúha nya aŋ dalawa ŋ
dagàʾ, inamù-amú 5nya, at sinábi nya
ŋ bumútas silà sa kahò ŋ kanila ŋ
kinàkùkuluŋàn. Aŋ maŋa dagà ay nagumpisà naŋ
pagkagàt sa tablà at
untì-untí sila ŋ nakagawá naŋ
húkay sa makapàl na tablà, haŋgàŋ sa itò y nabútas.
Naŋ makabútas na silà ay bumalìk silà
ŋ mulí kay Hwàn at si
Hwàn namàn ay pinabútas silà ŋ
mulìʾ sa 10dindìŋ naŋ
kùlúŋan. Sa paguúlit-úlit naŋ
kanila ŋ paggawá naŋ maŋa bútas, sa kalaúnan ay
nakagawá silà naŋ isà ŋ malaki ŋ
bútas, at si Hwàn ay
nakawalàʾ.
|
However, when he woke up on the next day, he was
surprised and frightened when he saw that he was locked up in a box
without any opening. He kicked at the walls of the box, but was not
able to do anything: he could not open it. Great was his despair, and
he did not know what to do, when he remembered that he had a cat and
two rats with him in his prison. He took the two rats, petted them, and
told them to make a hole in the box in which they were confined. The
rats began to gnaw at the boards, and gradually they succeeded in
making a hole in the thick board, until it was pierced through. When
they had pierced it, they returned to Juan, and Juan had them again
pierce the wall of the prison. When they had made holes again and
again, they finally succeeded in making a large opening, and Juan was
able to escape.
|
|
Aŋ matandà ay hinánap ni Hwàn,
dátapuwat itò y hindí nya màkíta
káhit saàn. Kanyà ipinatúluy nyà
aŋ pagwèʾ, at doòn naŋ 15dumatìŋ sya ay ipinamalítà
nya aŋ malakì ŋ serbísyo na ginawá sa
kanyà naŋ kanya ŋ tatlò ŋ kaybíga
ŋ isà ŋ púsaʾ at dalawa ŋ
dagàʾ.
|
Juan looked for the old man, but did not find him
anywhere. So he continued on his way home, and when he arrived there,
he told of the great service which had been done him by his three
friends, a cat and two rats.
|
|
25. Si Hwà ŋ maŋdudúkit.
|
25. Juan the
sculptor.
|
|
Nàbása ku sa isa ŋ nobéla ŋ
Kastílaʾ na aŋ pamagàt ay “La
20tùmba de yèrro”
aŋ sumúsunòd.
|
I once read, in a Spanish novel entitled La tumba de hierro, the following story:
|
|
Si Hwàn ay isa
ŋ báta ŋ lilimáhi ŋ taòn,
anàk naŋ isà ŋ kasamà naŋ mayáma ŋ si
Andrès. Si Hwàn mulá pa sa
pagkabátàʾ ay
pípe, dátapuwat hindìʾ biŋè.
Gayon dìn aŋ pagkapípe nya ay hindí
malubhàʾ, sapagkàt kadalasàn sya y
nakasísigàw, 25dátapuwat
hindí ŋàʾ lámaŋ gáya
naŋ tinìg naŋ karanyúwa ŋ
bátaʾ aŋ sa kanyà.
|
Juan was a child of five years, the son of a workman of
the wealthy Andrés. Juan was dumb from birth, but not deaf.
Moreover, his dumbness was not complete, for often he was able to cry
out, though his voice was not like that of a normal child.
|
|
Isa ŋ gabì si Andrès ay
dumálaw sa báhay naŋ kanyà ŋ
kasamà na ama ni Hwàn,
at sa kanya ŋ pagdálaw na ytò y isináma
nya aŋ kanya ŋ anàk
na babáye, lilimáhin dì ŋ taòn aŋ
gúlaŋ. 30Káhit na pípe si Hwàn ay
nakipagkayibígan sya sa anàk naŋ kanya ŋ paŋinoòn, at silà
ŋ dalawà y nagsipaglaròʾ hábaŋ
aŋ kanilà ŋ maŋa
amà ay nagsàsàlitáan naŋ
tuŋkòl sa pananìm. Ipinakíta nya kay Maryà (na sya ŋ
paŋálan naŋ kanya ŋ kalaròʾ) aŋ
maŋa larwan nyà na gawá naŋ kanya ŋ
saríli ŋ kamày 35at
talíno.
|
One evening Andrés visited the house of his
workman, Juan’s father, and on this visit he brought along his
daughter, who also was five years old. In spite of his dumbness, Juan
made friends with his master’s child, and the two played together
while their fathers were discussing matters of farming. He showed Maria
(this was the name of his playmate) his toys, which he had made by his
own hand and skill.
|
|
Aŋ kanya ŋ maŋa laruwàn ay
sarì-sári ŋ mukhá naŋ táo na
ginawá nya at
nayàyárì naŋ pútik. Marámi rin
díto aŋ maŋa buò ŋ táo na may
sarì-sári ŋ anyòʾ. Aŋ ibà y
nagtátanìm, aŋ ibà y nagsásayàw, aŋ ibà
y nakahigàʾ, at gayon dìn may maŋa 40nagbúbunòʾ,
nagtàtakbúhan, at iba t iba pà ŋ
anyòʾ. Gayon dìn máy maŋa háyop
syà; aŋ ibà y nayàyárì naŋ
pútek at aŋ ibà y nayàyári
naŋ káhoy.
|
His toys were all kinds of faces of people which he had
made, and they were made of clay. There were also many whole figures of
people in all kinds of positions. Some were planting, some were
dancing, some were lying down, and there were also some wrestling,
running, and in many other positions. He also had animals; some were
made of clay and others were made of wood.
|
|
Tumálik aŋ
pagkakaybígan naŋ dalawa ŋ bátaʾ at
nàwíli sila sa
paglalaròʾ. Naŋ makatápus nà aŋ
kanila ŋ amà sa pagsasàlitáan ay
tináwag ni Andrès si Maryà úpaŋ
umwí na silà, dátapuwat 5niyáyà
múna ni Maryà aŋ kanya ŋ amà sa
lugàr na kinàlàlagyàn naŋ maŋa
larwàn ni Hwàn, at úpaŋ itò y
màkíta nyà. Naŋ màmasdan ny Andrès aŋ maŋa larwa
ŋ yòn ay nàpagúlat sya sa lakì naŋ talíno na
ipinakìkilála naŋ dumúkit sa maŋa
tao-taóha ŋ iyòn. Sinábi ny Andrès sa
ama ni Hwàn na itò y matalíno at 10dápat ipadalà sa
pàaralàn. Dátapwat isinagòt naŋ ama ni
Hwàn na syà y wala
ŋ kwàrta úpaŋ ipapagáral kay
Hwàn.
|
The two children became good friends and were engrossed
in play. When their fathers had finished their conversation,
Andrés called Maria to go home, but Maria first asked her father
to come to where Juan’s toys were, so that he might see them.
When Andrés beheld the toys, he was astonished at the great
ability shown by the one who had shaped these manikins. Andrés
told Juan’s father that Juan was gifted and ought to be sent to
school. But Juan’s father answered that he had no money with
which to let Juan study.
|
|
“Kuŋ
gayòn,” sinábi ni Andrès, “ay
akò aŋ ùúpa sa mayèstro. Búkas ay páparoon sa
ámi ŋ báhay aŋ gurò ni Maryà. Sya
y papagtùtuluyìn ku
díto sa iyò, úpaŋ umpisahàn nya
aŋ pagtutúroʾ 15at pagbubukàs
naŋ ísip ni Hwàn.”
|
“In that case,” said Andrés, “I
will pay the teacher. Tomorrow Maria’s teacher is coming to our
house. I shall have him go on here to you, to begin the teaching of
Juan and the opening up of his mind.”
|
|
Napasalámat
naŋ marámi ŋ marámi aŋ ama ni Hwàn
at silà y naghiwalày.
Malakì aŋ ikinaluŋkòt ni Hwàn naŋ
umalis nà aŋ kanyà ŋ kalaròʾ.
|
Juan’s father thanked him profusely, and they
parted. Juan was very sorry when his playmate left.
|
|
Mulá sa
áraw na itò kadalasàn si Hwàn ay
ipinasúsundò naŋ 20ama ni Maryà
úpaŋ doòn siyà sa kanya ŋ báhay
makipaglaròʾ kay Maryà.
|
From that day on Maria’s father often sent for
Juan that he might play with Maria there in his house.
|
|
Isa ŋ hápon na silà ŋ
dalawà y naglálaro sa hàlamanan naŋ maláwak na bakúran ni
Andrès ay nagdaà ŋ lumílipàd sa
tabì naŋ dalawa ŋ
bátaʾ aŋ isa ŋ paruparò. Itò y
kanila ŋ hinábol. Nàùunà 25si
Maryà at sumúsunòd si Hwàn. Sa
pagtatakbò nilà ay nahúlog si Maryà sa isa ŋ sápa ŋ
mabábaw na pàbyáyan naŋ maŋa
isdàʾ niy Andrès.
Si Hwàn ay nàpasigàw naŋ malakàs at
pagsigàw nya ŋ itò
y napatiràn sya naŋ lamàn sa lalamúnan at
nagdudugòʾ aŋ kanya
ŋ bibìg. Hindí nya itò inalintána at
tumalòn din sya 30sa sápaʾ úpaŋ iligtàs
si Maryà sa pagkalúnod. Sa kababáwan naŋ
sápaʾ ay hindí naŋalúnod aŋ
dalawà ŋ bátaʾ, dátapuwat
siniglàn lámaŋ si
Maryà naŋ malaki ŋ tákot na sya nyà
ŋ ipinaghimatày naŋ násàsa túbig
na syà. Kanyàʾ aŋ ginawá ni Hwàn
ay hinawákan nya si
Maryà sa likòd at itinaas nyà úpaŋ
hwàg makáinom 35naŋ túbig,
hábaŋ syà ay nàsìsísid sa
túbig. Ganitò aŋ anyú nila naŋ màdatnan silà naŋ isa
ŋ alíla ny Andrès at silà y
hináŋo sa sápàʾ. Malakì aŋ
pagkàgúlat niy Andrès at malakì aŋ
nagiŋ twàʾ naŋ ama ni Hwàn naŋ si
Hwàn ay márinig nila ŋ magsalitàʾ at ibalítà sa kanilà
aŋ naŋyári.
40Dáhil sa
pagsasalitá ni Hwàn ay lálu ŋ lumakàs
aŋ kanya ŋ pagsúloŋ sa pagaáral, at gayon
dìn lálu ŋ tumálik aŋ
pagkakaybígan nila ni
Maryà. Dumatìŋ aŋ áraw na sinábi
naŋ gurú nya na sya y
dápat lumípat naŋ báyan úpaŋ
ipatúluy aŋ pagaáral, sapagkàt sya y walá na ŋ
màitúro sa kanyà. Itò y sinábi rin
nyà kay Andrès. Aŋ ginawá ny Andrès ay
ipinadalà si Hwàn sa isa
ŋ eskwèlhan naŋ paŋdudúkit, at díto
sya nagáral na may ánim na taòn.
|
One afternoon when the two were playing in the garden in
the wide grounds of Andrés, a butterfly came flying past the two
children. They ran after it. Maria ran ahead and Juan followed. As they
were running, Maria fell into a shallow pool which Andrés used
as a fishpond. Juan gave a loud cry, and, as he cried out, a muscle in
his throat broke and his mouth bled. He paid no attention to this and
jumped into the pool to save Maria from drowning. As the pool was
shallow, the two children did not drown, only Maria was filled with
great fear, which caused her to faint while still in the water. So what
Juan did was to take hold of Maria by her back and lift her up, so that
she should not swallow any water,—he himself meanwhile being
immersed. They were in this position when a servant of Andrés
came upon them and rescued them from the pool.
Great was the surprise of Andrés and great was
the joy which came to Juan’s father, when they heard Juan talk
and tell them what had happened. What with Juan’s talking, his
progress in his studies became much greater and his friendship with
Maria grew much stronger.
There came the day when his teacher said that he ought
to go to another town to continue his studies, for he could teach him
nothing more. He told this also to Andrés. Andrés sent
Juan to a school for sculptors, and there he studied for about six
years.
|
|
5Si Hwàn at si Maryà ay nagsilakì
at aŋ kanila ŋ pagkakaybígan ay nagìŋ pagiìbígan. Twì
ŋ bakasyòn ay umuwèʾ si Hwàn sa kanilà ŋ báhay sa
búkid ni Andrès at doòn sya
nagpàpalípas naŋ
áraw sa píliŋ ni Mariyà.
|
Juan and Maria grew up and their friendship turned into
love. Every vacation Juan went home to their house on
Andrés’ estate, and there he passed the days at
Maria’s side.
|
|
Dumatìŋ
aŋ isa ŋ áraw naŋ pagtatanyágan naŋ
maŋa dinúkit 10naŋ maŋa artísta, at dáhil
díto y pinagarálan ni Hwàn aŋ isa ŋ áyos na kanya ŋ dápat
dukítin parà sa áraw na itò. Aŋ manálo sa maŋa kasále ay
bìbigyàn naŋ isa ŋ ganti ŋ
pálà na may malaki
ŋ kasáma ŋ kwàlta, bukòd sa
pagdiríwaŋ sa karàŋálan naŋ mànanalò. May isà
ŋ taò ŋ nagtrabáho si Hwàn sa kanya
15ŋ
kumpusisyòn.
|
There came a day for the exhibition of the sculptures of
the artists, and Juan had planned a design which he was going to carry
out for that day. The victor among the contestants was to be given a
prize that was to be accompanied by much money, in addition to a
celebration in honor of the winner. For about a year Juan worked at his
composition.
|
|
Dumatìŋ
aŋ áraw naŋ pagtatanyàg naŋ maŋa
dinúkit. Si Hwàn, aŋ kanya ŋ amà, si
Andrès, at si Maryà ay naparoòn sa báhay na kinàdòroonàn
naŋ maŋa dinúkit. Lubhà ŋ marámi
aŋ maŋa táo,
dátapuwat aŋ pinagkàkalipumpunàn nilà
ay aŋ dinúkit 20ni Hwàn. Si Maryà ay
nápaiyàk sa twàʾ sa gandà naŋ
dinúkit ni Hwàn. Si Andrès namàn ay
walà ŋ màláma ŋ sabíhin sa pagpúri. Dumatìŋ
aŋ óras naŋ pagpapaháyag naŋ maŋa
hukòm kuŋ síno
aŋ nanálo, at aŋ dinúkit ni Hwàn ay sya
ŋ binaŋgìt na
nakakúha naŋ gantì ŋ pálaʾ.
|
The day for presenting the statues arrived. Juan, his
father, Andrés, and Maria went to the building
where the statues were. Many people were there, but they were all
crowding round Juan’s statue. Andrés did not know what to
say in his admiration. The hour came when the judges announced who was
the winner, and Juan’s statue was that named as having won the
prize.
|
|
25Itò y isa ŋ grúpo ŋ
máy-roo ŋ isa ŋ babáye ŋ
nakatindìg. Aŋ
kaliwà ŋ kamày ay may háwak na isa ŋ
sulòʾ at aŋ kánan namàn ay isa ŋ
koróna ŋ dáhon. Sa banda ŋ kánan
naŋ babáe at sa
ilálim naŋ koróna ŋ olíva ay may
isà ŋ bináta ŋ nàlùluhod aŋ kána ŋ paà. Sa
kanya ŋ kaliwàʾ ay may háwak sya ŋ
librò 30at sa kánan ay isa ŋ pamukpòk. Sa
kanilà ŋ paánan ay nàsàsábug
aŋ iba t iba ŋ
kasaŋkápan naŋ isa ŋ nagàáral.
|
It was a group with a standing woman. Her left hand held
a torch and her right a crown of leaves. At the right of the woman and
under the crown of olive a youth was kneeling on his right foot. In his
left hand he was holding a book, and in his right a hammer. At their
feet lay scattered various implements of a student.
|
|
Naŋ silà y
umuwèʾ ipinagtapàt naŋ dalawa ŋ
nagkàkàibígan sa kanila ŋ maŋa
magúlaŋ aŋ kanila ŋ líhim. Aŋ ama ni
Hwàn ay naluŋkòt
lámaŋ, sapagkàt nàlàláman nya
na aŋ pagkakasàl sa 35kanila ŋ dalawà
ay hindí maàáriʾ, sapagkàt aŋ
kanila ŋ lagày ay
gáya naŋ sa isa ŋ busábos o alípin at
isa ŋ paŋinoòn o háreʾ. Pagkáalam
ni Andrès sa bágay na itò ay siniglàn sya
naŋ malaki ŋ gálit.
Ipinatáwag nya si Hwàn at kanya ŋ minúra.
Sinábi nya ŋ sya y
walà ŋ hyàʾ at hindí marúnoŋ
tumanàw naŋ útaŋ 40na loòb,
hindí marúnoŋ kumilála sa
nagparúnoŋ sa kanyà, at sinábi nya ŋ hindí sya
maàári ŋ màpakasàl kay Mariyà.
Dáhil díto y sya y umalìs agad-agàd na
walà ŋ nakààalàm káhit
síno naŋ kanya ŋ
patùtuŋúhan.
|
On the way home the two lovers revealed their secret to
their parents. Juan’s father was merely grieved, for he knew that
the marriage of the two was not possible, for their position was like
that of a slave or thrall and a lord or king. When Andrés
learned of the matter, he was filled with great anger. He had Juan
called to him and scolded him. He told him he was shameless and did not
know how to appreciate favors,—did not know how to repay the man
who had given him his education, and told him that he could not marry
Maria. Accordingly Juan at once went away without anyone’s
knowing his destination.
|
|
Nagdaàn aŋ limà o ánim na
taòn at si Hwàn sa kanya ŋ paŋdudúkit ay káylan ma y hindí
nalìlimútan si Maryà.
|
Five or six years passed, and Juan at his sculpture did
not forget Maria.
|
|
Si Mariyà
namàn ay nagpalípas naŋ ánim na tao ŋ
itò sa kanya ŋ báhay.
Nàlùlugmok syà hábaŋ panahòn sa
isa ŋ malálim 5na kaluŋkútan at tuwí na y si
Hwàn aŋ kanya ŋ nààalaála. Si
Maryà y nagkasakìt naŋ malubhàʾ at
malápit na ŋ mamámatày.
|
Maria passed these six years in her house. She was sunk
at all times in a deep grief, and it was always Juan of whom she was
thinking. Maria fell seriously ill and was near to death.
|
|
Ipináyu naŋ maŋgagámot nya kay
Andrès na, kuŋ íbig nya ŋ máligtas aŋ kanya ŋ anàk, ay
sundìn nya aŋ gusto nitò tuŋkòl sa pagaasáwa kay Hwàn.
Dátapuwat naŋ pumáyag siy Andrès 10ay
lubhà ŋ huli nà. Palalá naŋ
palalàʾ aŋ sakìt ni Maryà, at si
Hwàn namàn ay hindí nya
nàlàláman kuŋ saàn aŋ
kinàdòroonàn. Marámi sya ŋ inutúsan sa malalaki
ŋ báyan úpaŋ hanápin si Hwàn, dátapuwat nakaraan nà
aŋ marámi ŋ áraw ay walá pa ŋ
nagkapálad káhit
isà sa kanilà na makátagpòʾ kay
Hwàn.
|
Her physician advised Andrés that, if he wanted
to save his daughter, he would have to follow her desire regarding
marriage to Juan. But when Andrés consented, it was already too
late. Maria’s sickness went from bad to worse, and he did not
even know where Juan was. He sent many messengers to the large towns to
look for Juan, but even when many days had passed, not one of them had
succeeded in finding Juan.
|
|
15Sa kalaúnan aŋ isa sa kanilà y
nàtagpuan itò sa báya-ŋ-Kamálig sa kanya ŋ gàwáan.
Naŋ màbalitáan nya na ipinasúsundo syà ni Andrès úpaŋ
ipakasàl sila ŋ dalawà ni Maryà, ay
lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ kanyà ŋ
nagiŋ twàʾ. Dátapuwat gayon dìn malakì aŋ kanya ŋ
tákot na baká hindí nya abúta ŋ
buhày aŋ 20kanya ŋ inìíbig. Sya y
matúli ŋ matúli ŋ umwèʾ at naŋ
dumatìŋ sya sa báhay niy Andrès ay
nàkíta nya doòn aŋ butò t balàt
na paŋaŋatawàn ni
Maryà nàlàlátag sa kanya ŋ
hihigàn. Naŋ sandalí ri ŋ iyòn ay nagpasundú si
Andrès naŋ isa ŋ páreʾ, at si Hwàn at si Maryà y
ipinakasàl. Hábaŋ aŋ pagkakasàl ay
idinàdaos 25naŋ páreʾ aŋ
hiniŋà namàn ni Maryà ay
pumàpánaw. Naŋ mákasal na silà ay nagkaroòn
lámaŋ si Hwàn naŋ panahò ŋ
mahagkàn aŋ kanya ŋ
asáwa, at itò y pinanáwan naŋ
hiniŋà na aŋ mukhá y masayà at
nàŋìŋitì aŋ bibìg.
|
At last one of them came upon him in the town of Kamalig
in his workshop. When he was told that he was being sent for by
Andrés that he and Maria might be married, his joy was very
great. But he was also much afraid that he might not find his loved one
alive. He went home with all possible speed, and when he arrived at the
house of Andrés, he found there the body of Maria, mere bone and
skin, stretched out on her couch. That very moment Andrés sent
for a priest, and Juan and Maria were married. While the
marriage-ceremony was being performed by the priest, Maria’s
breath ceased. When they were married, Juan had but time to kiss his
wife before her breath left her, her face glad and her mouth smiling.
|
|
26. Si Markíta.
|
26. Marquita.
|
|
30Si Markíta
ay isà ŋ dalága ŋ mabaìt at
magandà, dátapuwat mahírap. Sya y máy-roo ŋ isa ŋ
nóbyo na mahírap dìn, dátapuwat may empléyo sa gobyèrno sa
Maynílaʾ at máy-roo ŋ mabúti ŋ
swèldo.
|
Marquita was a good and beautiful young woman, but
poor. She was betrothed to a man who also was poor, but had a position
with the Government in Manila and received good pay.
|
|
Si Markíta ay máy-roo ŋ isa ŋ
kápit-báhay na mayáman. Aŋ 35báhay ay
tablà, at yéro aŋ bubuŋàn,
malápad aŋ kanya ŋ bukirìn. Aŋ kápit-báhay na ytò y
malakì aŋ pagkágusto kay Markíta, dátapuwat hindí nátin
màsàsábe kuŋ túnay aŋ kanya
ŋ pagíbig, sapagkàt
maluwàg aŋ kanya ŋ tornílyo. Lahàt
naŋ pagsúyoʾ ay ginawá nya kay Markíta,
dátapuwat si Markíta y isa ŋ dalága ŋ
hindí
sa-lawáhan aŋ loòb, at aŋ lahàt naŋ
kanya ŋ pagsúyoʾ ay hindí pinansìn.
|
Marquita had a rich neighbor. His house was of wood,
with an iron roof, and his estate was large. This neighbor had a great
liking for Marquita, but we cannot say whether his love was true, for
he had a screw loose. He paid every attention to Marquita, but Marquita
was not a girl of fickle heart and paid no heed to all his
attentions.
|
|
Sa kalakhàn naŋ pagíbig naŋ
maŋlilígaw na si Markíta ay mápasa kanyà, aŋ ginawá nya y
gumámit naŋ lakàs. Isa ŋ hápon 5pumások
sa bakúran nila Markíta at nagkubli syà sa isa
ŋ púno-ŋ-ságiŋ. Naŋ hápu ŋ yoòn ay nagkátaon
namà ŋ aŋ bakúran nilà Markíta ay marumì. Kanyà
itò y nanáog at niwalisàn aŋ bakúran. Pagkátabi nyà sa
púno-ŋ-ságiŋ na pinagkùkublihàn
naŋ laláke, itò y lumápit pagdáka,
tinaŋnàn sya sa kamày at kanyà 10sya
hinagkàn.
|
So great was the desire of this suitor to win Marquita
that he decided to employ force. One afternoon he went into the yard of
Marquita’s family and hid in a banana-tree. It happened that
on this afternoon Marquita’s yard was dirty. Accordingly she went
and swept the yard. When she came near the banana-tree in which the man
was hiding, he suddenly dropped down, seized her by the hand and kissed
her.
|
|
Nàlàláman na ninyò na sa
maŋa mahihinhì ŋ táo doòn sa átin aŋ isa ŋ halìk
ay isa ŋ malakì ŋ kasiraàn naŋ
púri. Dáhil díto naŋ si Markíta ay
pumanhìk sa báhay na umíiyàk, at naŋ
màláman naŋ kanya
ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ na syà y
tinampalásan o 15hinagkàn naŋ laláki ŋ
iyòn, inakálà nila na walà ŋ iba
ŋ paŋtakìp sa
kasiraà-ŋ-púri ŋ itò kuŋ
hindí aŋ ipakasàl nilà sa laláki
ŋ iyòn aŋ
kanilà ŋ anàk na si Markíta. Káhit
anò ŋ pagayàw aŋ ginawá ni Markíta at káhit na
nàlàláman nilà na itò y may
kaìbígan, ay kanila rì ŋ ipinatúloy
aŋ pagkakasàl.
|
As you know, among reputable people in our country a
single kiss is a great stain on a girl’s honor. Therefore, when
Marquita came into the house weeping and her parents found out that she
had been roughly handled or kissed by this man, they decided that there
was no other way of covering up this disgrace than marrying their
daughter Marquita to this man. No matter how much Marquita objected,
and although they knew that she had a sweetheart, they nevertheless
prepared for the marriage.
|
|
20Si Markíta ay isa ŋ báta ŋ
lubhà ŋ masùnúrin sa kanya ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ, kanyá
hindí sya makasuwày naŋ tòtohánan
ŋayòn. Aŋ
ginawá na lámaŋ niyà ay isinúlat nya
sa kanya ŋ nóvyo aŋ maŋa naŋyári at
maŋyàyári at sinábi nya ŋ aŋ
magígiŋ pagkakasàl sa kanyà ay isa lámaŋ pagsunòd
sa maŋa magúlaŋ at siya 25rìn ay kanya ŋ inìíbig. Sa
maŋa magúlaŋ namàn ni Markíta ay kanya ŋ sinábi na sya ay
hindí nila pakìkinabáŋan, sapagkàt
aŋ pagkakasàl nya sa
táu ŋ kanya ŋ kinabùbuwisítan ay
kanyà ŋ ikamámatay
na madalìʾ.
|
Marquita was a daughter very obedient to her parents, so
she could not actually disobey them now. All she did was to write her
betrothed what had happened and what was going to happen and to tell
him that her coming marriage was only an act of obedience to her
parents, and that she loved only him. To her parents Marquita said that
they would get no joy from her, for her marriage to the man whom she
abhorred would soon be the death of her.
|
|
Ikinasàl
silà. Hindí nalaúnan at inapuyàn si
Markíta naŋ 30lagnàt. Mulá sa áraw naŋ
kanya ŋ pagkakasàl ay hindí sya makakáin
naŋ káhit anò, at
áraw-gabì sya y lumùlúhaʾ. Aŋ
maŋa magagalìŋ na
médiko sa báyan, aŋ lahàt naŋ
yáman naŋ kanya ŋ
asáwa, at aŋ lahàt naŋ maŋa
panaláŋin naŋ kanya ŋ maŋa magúlaŋ ay hindí
makapagligtàs sa kanyà sa kamàtáyan.
Pagkaraàn 35naŋ pitù ŋ áraw naŋ
kanya ŋ pagkákasàl ay sya y namatày.
Itò y nagìŋ malakì ŋ
kaluŋkútan naŋ kanya ŋ nagìŋ
nóbyo at isa ŋ
nakatúloŋ sa nagìŋ
kasawià-ŋ-pálad nitò sa kanya ŋ
búhay na dumatìŋ.
|
They were married. It was not long before Marquita was
stricken with fever. From the day of her marriage she was not able to
eat anything, and she shed tears day and night. The skilful physicians
of the town, all the wealth of her husband, and all the prayers of her
parents, failed to save her from death. Seven days after her wedding
she died. This caused much grief to her former betrothed and
contributed to his misfortune in his later life.
|
|
27. Aŋ maŋmàŋ na
páreʾ.
|
27. The ignorant
priest.
|
|
40Sa
báya-ŋ-Balíwag ay máy nàdistíno
ŋ isa ŋ pári ŋ wala ŋ muwàŋ káhit anu màn.
Hinìhinálaʾ naŋ maŋa táo na
syà y isa ŋ sakatéro
lámaŋ sa Espánya na nápadpad doòn at
idinistíno sa kanilà
ŋ báyan úpaŋ magkaroòn naŋ
swèldo at sa gayò y máligtas sa pagkamatày naŋ gútom.
Liŋgo-liŋgò syà y nagmìmísa,
dátapwat 5aŋ maŋa nakíkinig naŋ
mísa ay wala ŋ márinig sa kanyà kuŋ hindìʾ aŋ salità
ŋ “Mísa, mísa, mísa,” at iba
pà. Papasí-pasyal sa
harapàn naŋ altàr; kuŋ mínsan ay
humáharap sa maŋa táo, pinagdódoop aŋ kamày, at sa
lahàt naŋ pagkílos nya ŋ itò y wala ŋ patìd nya ŋ
sinàsábi aŋ “Mísa, mísa,
mísa,” at iba pà.
|
To the town of Baliwag there was once assigned a
priest who had no education whatever. The people surmised that he
was only a grass-cutter in Spain, who had been cast hither by chance
and assigned as priest to their town so that he might have some income
and so be saved from dying of hunger. Every Sunday he said mass, but
those who heard the mass could hear nothing from him, except only the
word “Mass, mass, mass,” and so on. He would walk round in
front of the altar; at times he faced the people, brought his hands
together, and, while making all these movements, he would keep saying
his “Mass, mass, mass,” and so on.
|
|
10Aŋ maŋa táo y nagálit at
ipinagsumbòŋ sya sa arsubìspo. Aŋ sagòt naŋ arsubìspo ay
páparoon sya ŋ isà ŋ liŋgò at
makíkinig naŋ mísa,
úpaŋ màkíta kuŋ túnay
ŋàʾ aŋ sumboŋ nilà.
|
The people got angry and reported him to the archbishop.
The answer of the archbishop was that he would come some Sunday and
hear the mass to see if their accusation was really true.
|
|
Dumatìŋ doòn aŋ
arsubìspo. Sa kanyà y sinábi naŋ
páriʾ na sya y
hindí makapagmísa, sapagkàt aŋ maŋa
ulòl na táo ay 15nagààlísan sa simbáhan
paguumpisà nya naŋ mísa.
|
The archbishop arrived. The priest told him that he was
not able to perform mass, because the silly people all left the church
as soon as he began mass.
|
|
“Búkas,” sinábi pa nyà,
“ay màmàmasdàn ninyò aŋ kanila
ŋ pagtatakbúhan sa
pagbebendisyòn ko pa lámaŋ.”
|
“Tomorrow,” he added, “you will see
how they all run away as soon as I give the blessing.”
|
|
Kinàbukásan ay liŋgò at sa
pagmimísa nya ay háharap aŋ arsubìspo. Umísip sya naŋ paraàn
naŋ pagliligtàs sa kanya ŋ 20saríle.
Kanyàʾ, bágu sya nagumpisà naŋ
pagmimísa ay nagpakuló sya naŋ laŋìs. Hábaŋ sya y
nagbìbíhis aŋ maŋa táo namàn
at aŋ arsubìspo ay
nàùupú na sa simbáhan. Aŋ
arsubìspo ay malápit sa altàr at hábaŋ
sya y nagbìbíhis aŋ laŋìs namàn
ay kasalukúya ŋ
kumúkulòʾ. Naŋ makapagbíhis na
syà ay ibinúhus 25nya sa lalagyàn
naŋ túbig na bendíta aŋ kumúkulu ŋ
laŋìs. Aŋ ugálì nya ay magbendisyòn múna
bágu magmísa, kanyàʾ pagpások nya sa simbáhan ay sya nyà
ŋ iniwisìk sa maŋa táo aŋ kumúkulu
ŋ laŋìs sa
lugàr naŋ àgwa-bendíta. Aŋ maŋa
táo ŋ dinapúan naŋ maiínit na patàk naŋ
laŋìs ay nagsipagtindìg at
úbus-làkása 30ŋ
nagsipagtakbúhan papalabàs sa simbáhan. Naŋ
màkíta itò
naŋ arsubìspo ay hindí nya ipinatulòy aŋ
pagmimísa sa áraw na iyòn, sapagkàt wala
ŋ nátira sa simbáhan ní isa màn sa
maŋa táo.
|
The next day was Sunday and at his mass the archbishop
was to be present. He planned a way of saving himself. Accordingly,
before beginning the mass, he caused some oil to boil. While he was
putting on his vestments the people and the archbishop were seated in
the church. The archbishop was near the altar, and, while the priest
was putting on his vestments, the oil was boiling. When he had put on
his vestments, he poured the boiling oil into the vessel for holy
water. It was his custom to give the blessing before saying mass, so,
when he entered the church, he sprinkled the boiling oil on the people
instead of holy-water. The people, struck by the drops of hot oil, all
jumped up and ran with all their might out of the church. When the
archbishop saw this, he did not have the mass gone on with on that day,
for there was not a single one of the people left in the church.
|
|
Sinábi naŋ
arsubìspo sa párìʾ na sya y hindí
mààalìs sa báya 35ŋ iyòn at
hindí na nyà pàpansinìn aŋ anu
mà ŋ ipagsumbòŋ naŋ maŋa
táo.
|
The archbishop said to the priest that he would not have
to leave the town and that hereafter he would not heed any accusation
that the people made.
|
|
3029. Si Hwà ŋ
bíbas.
|
29. Juan the joker.
|
|
Si Hwàn ay
isa táo ŋ mapaggawá naŋ kaululàn,
dátapuwat itò y
hindí nya sinásadyàʾ úpaŋ
magpagálit naŋ kápwa táo, kuŋ hindí yon ay talagà ŋ sya
nyà ŋ ugáliʾ na átas sa kanya naŋ
kanya ŋ pagiísip.
|
Juan was a man given to doing nonsensical things, but he
did not do them intentionally to anger his fellow-men; it was merely
his natural habit, prompted by his character.
|
|
35Mínsan sya y naparòn sa fiyèsta
naŋ isa ŋ báyan. May pasàn sya ŋ tatlò ŋ biìk,
úpaŋ ipagbilè sa báyan. Naŋ sya y
dumatiŋ nà, nàkíta nya sa pátyo
naŋ simbáhan aŋ marámi ŋ táo ŋ nalìlípon at
nakíkinìg naŋ biníbigkas na
talumpátiʾ naŋ kápitan sa báyan. Masikìp aŋ
pagkakátayo naŋ maŋa táo, dátapwat
40sya y
nálapit dìn sa paanàn naŋ entabládo na
kinàtàtayuàn naŋ nagtàtalumpátiʾ. Hábaŋ
nakìkipagsiksíkan syà, aŋ tatlò ŋ
biìk ay wala ŋ
lubày naŋ pagyàk. Naŋ syà y
makaratiŋ nà sa harapàn naŋ kápitan, tinúkup nya aŋ
maŋa bibìg, úpaŋ silà y
patahanìn, dátapwat
walá sya ŋ magawàʾ. Náino naŋ
kápitan aŋ maŋa
ìyákan naŋ biìk at tiniŋnan nyà
kuŋ síno aŋ máy dala doòn 5naŋ maŋa biìk.
|
Once he went to the festival of a certain town. He was
carrying three young pigs to sell in the town. When he got there, he
saw many people gathered in the courtyard of the church and listening
to a speech which the mayor of the town was delivering. The people
stood in a dense crowd, but he succeeded in getting close to the foot
of the platform on which the orator was standing. While he took part in
the crowding, the three pigs kept squealing. When he had arrived in
front of the mayor, he held his hand over their mouths to make them
keep quiet, but he did not succeed. The mayor
took notice of the squealing of the pigs and looked round to see who
had brought the pigs there.
|
|
Naŋ màkíta nya si Hwàn ay
sinábi nya aŋ ganítò: “Huwán!
Anò aŋ gustu mò
ŋ sabíhin sa pagpapaiyàk mo díto naŋ iyo
ŋ maŋa biìk?
Lumáyas ka ŋayon dìn, at hwag kà ŋ
makàtuntoŋ-tuntòŋ káylan màn sa
lúpa-ŋ-Bùstos!”
|
When he saw Juan he addressed him as follows:
“Juan! What do you mean by making your pigs squeal here? Get out
of here at once and never again dare to set foot on the ground of
Bustos!”
|
|
10Si Hwàn ay umalìs at umwèʾ
sa kanya ŋ báyan sa San-Ildepònso. Nakaraàn
aŋ isa ŋ taòn at dumatìŋ na
mulìʾ aŋ fyèsta sa báyan naŋ Bùstos.
Iníbig ni Hwàn na pumaroòn, dátapuwat
nàalaála nya na
tinaŋáan sya naŋ kápitan sa báya ŋ
iyòn na, pag sya y nàkíta ŋ mulìʾ
sa lúpa-ŋ-Bùstos, ay sya y 15ipabíbilaŋgòʾ
at pahìhirápan. Umísip si Hwàn naŋ
paraàn úpaŋ makaparòn.
|
Juan departed and went home to his town of San
Ildefonso. A year passed, and the festival in the town of Bustos came
round again. Juan wanted to go there, but he remembered that the mayor
of that town had threatened him that, if he were seen again on the
ground of Bustos, he would have him imprisoned and tortured. Juan
thought of a way of going there none the less.
|
|
Naŋ dumatìŋ aŋ fiyèsta ay
máy-roo ŋ isà ŋ mísa ŋ
malakì na dinaluhàn
naŋ líbo-líbo ŋ táo. Si Hwàn ay
isà sa maŋa táo ŋ itò at syà aŋ
nàpàpansìn naŋ marámi ŋ
táo, dahilàn sa anyò 20naŋ pagkálagay
nyà doòn sa loòb naŋ simbáhan.
Dí nalaúnan at
isà sa maŋa táo ŋ nagmámasid sa
kanyà ay nagsumbùŋ sa kápitan at
sinábi na si Hwàn ay násàsa loòb
naŋ simbáhan at nakasakày sa isa ŋ karéta na
hinìhíla naŋ kalabàw, at aŋ
lahàt, karéta, kalabàw, at si Hwàn ay
násàsa loòb naŋ simbáhan. Si 25Hwàn
ay hindí nanànáog sa karéta ŋ kanya
ŋ tinùtuntuŋàn.
|
When the festival arrived, there was a high mass, which
was attended by thousands of people. Juan was one of these people, and
he it was whom all the people were watching, owing to the manner of his
appearance there in the church. It was not long before one of the
people who were watching him complained to the mayor, saying that Juan
was in the church mounted on a wagon drawn by carabao, and that the whole
thing, wagon, carabao, and Juan, was inside the church. Juan
had not got down from the wagon on which he was standing.
|
|
Pumarùn aŋ kápitan sa simbáhan
úpaŋ hulíhin si Hwàn. Naŋ málapit syà díto ay
sinábi nyà: “Huwán! Sumunòd ka sa
ákin at
ibíbilaŋgú kità. Hindí ba
sinábi ko nà sa iyò t hwàg kà ŋ
tútuntoŋ naŋ
lúpa-ŋ-Bùstos?”
|
The mayor went to the church to arrest Juan. When he got
there he said: “Juan! Follow me, I am going to imprison you.
Didn’t I tell you not to set foot on the ground of
Bustos?”
|
|
30Isinagòt namàn ni Hwàn:
“Ginoò ŋ Kápitan! Sinábi
ŋàʾ po ninyò sa ákin iyàn.
Kanyàʾ akò y hindí makaalìs sa
áki ŋ karéta.
Nàkìkíta pú ba ninyò itò
ŋ lúpa ŋ lúlan naŋ áki ŋ
karéta at sya kò ŋ tinùtuntuŋàn?
Ito pòʾ ay hindè lúpa-ŋ-Bùstos
kuŋ hindí
lúpa-ŋ-San-Ildepònso. Doòn ko pòʾ
sa áki ŋ báyan kinúha 35aŋ lúpa ŋ itò.”
|
But Juan answered: “Mr. Mayor! You certainly did
tell me that. That is why I cannot get out of my wagon. Do you see this
earth, sir, with which my wagon is loaded and on which I am standing?
This is not the ground of Bustos, sir, but earth of San Ildefonso. I
got this earth in my town.”
|
|
Pagkàsábi ni Hwàn nitò ay
hindí nàpigílan naŋ kápitan aŋ
pagtáwa, at sinábi na
lámaŋ nya sa kanya ŋ saríli na syà y
wala ŋ magágawa kay
Hwàn, sapagkàt itò y nása
katwíran.
|
When Juan had said this, the mayor could not restrain
his laughter and only said to himself that he could do nothing to Juan,
for the latter was in the right.
|
|
30. Tatlò ŋ
magkakaybíga ŋ magnanákaw.
|
30. The three
thieves.
|
|
40Si Hwàn, si Andrès, at si Dyégo
ay tatlò ŋ magagalìŋ na magnanákaw. Silà y balíta ŋ
balítaʾ, at marámi ŋ táo aŋ
nagsìsihúle sa
kanilà, dátapuwat sa galìŋ nilà
naŋ paŋiŋílag at pagnanákaw ay hindí sila màhúle. Aŋ
tatlò ŋ itù y nagtìpána ŋ mínsan na magtatagpòʾ
sila sa isa ŋ lugàr na tahímik at líhim
5úpaŋ pagusápan nilà aŋ
kanilà ŋ pamumúhay at maŋa mabubúti
ŋ bágo ŋ paraàn naŋ pagnanákaw.
Silà ŋ tatlò ay nabùbúhay sa pagnanákaw lámaŋ.
Ní isa màn sa kanilà ay walà ŋ
paghahánap na mabúte. Mulá pa sa
pagkabátàʾ ay ganito nà aŋ kanila ŋ pamumúhay, kanyàʾ
silà y nagìŋ matalíno at lubhà ŋ
makínis 10sa gawa ŋ
itò.
|
Juan, Andrés, and Diego were three expert
thieves. They were very famous, and many people were trying to
catch them, but their cleverness at dodging and stealing kept them from
being caught. The three once made an appointment to meet at a certain
quiet and secret place to discuss their means of livelihood and new
good methods of thievery. Not one of them had an honest trade. This had
been their mode of life from childhood on, so they had become skilful
and very clever at this activity.
|
|
Naŋ
dumatìŋ aŋ áraw naŋ kanilà ŋ
tìpánan, madali ŋ áraw pa lámaŋ ay nàròroòn na
silà. Malakì ŋ pamamalítaʾ naŋ
báwat isà at
hindí magkàmáyaw aŋ kanila ŋ
pagbabàlitaàn.
|
When the day of their meeting came, they were there
already at dawn. Each one of them had much to tell, and, as they were
all talking at once, their stories were indistinguishable.
|
|
Itinanòŋ
ni Hwàn kay Dyégo: “Gánu ka na bà
kakínis 15ŋayòn sa
áti ŋ trabáho?”
|
Juan asked of Diego: “How skilled are you now at
your work?”
|
|
“Sa damdam
kò,” aŋ sagòt ni Dyégo, “ay
akò aŋ pinakamakínis sa áti ŋ tatlò, sapagkàt
akò y nakapagnànákaw naŋ maŋa itlòg na
hinàhalimhimàn naŋ manòk na hindí
nàlàláman nitò. At hindí itu lámaŋ,” idinugtuŋ
nyà, “aŋ maŋa háyop màn na
mababagsìk 20ay nànànakáwan ku naŋ
kanila ŋ inakày naŋ walá sila ŋ
málay.”
|
“In my opinion,” answered Diego, “I am
the most skilful of us three, for I am able to steal the eggs a hen is
brooding on without its knowing it. And not only this,” he
continued, “I am able to rob wild animals of their young without
their noticing it.”
|
|
“Ganyàn
ba lámaŋ aŋ kínis mo?” isinabàd
pagdáka ni Andrès, “Akò ay
nakapagnànákaw sa háyop at gayon dìn sa
táo. Aŋ maŋa
aláhas naŋ táo na íbig ko ŋ
nakáwin ay ninànákaw ko, 25káhit na natùtúlog o
naglálakad aŋ may áreʾ. Mínsan ay
ninákaw ko aŋ isa ŋ
siŋsìŋ na hinìhigàn naŋ may
áriʾ úpaŋ hwag mànákaw, dátapwat itò y
nànákaw ko naŋ walá sya ŋ
málay.”
|
“Is that all your skill?” Andrés
quickly interrupted, “I am able to rob animals and men too. I
have stolen all of people’s jewelry that I wanted to steal,
whether the owner was asleep or up and about. Once I stole a ring that
the owner was sleeping on to keep it from being stolen,—but I
stole it without his noticing.”
|
|
“Ganyàn ba lámaŋ aŋ
kínis ninyò?” itinanùŋ ni Hwàn,
“Walá sa kalahátì naŋ kínis ko
sa pagnanákaw aŋ inyù ŋ maŋa 30nagágawàʾ. Akò y
nakapagnànákaw naŋ táo mìsmo at
hindí naŋ kanila
lámaŋ na maŋa pagaáreʾ.”
|
“Is that all the skill you two have?” asked
Juan. “The things you do don’t come halfway up to my skill
at stealing. I can steal people themselves, and not only their
property.”
|
|
Nàpagúlat aŋ dalawà nya ŋ
kaúsap, sapagkàt hindí nila inakála ŋ
aŋ isa ŋ táo ŋ buhày ay
maàári ŋ mànákaw naŋ hindí
nito nàlàláman,
at úpaŋ subúkan nilà aŋ
galìŋ ni Hwàn ay nakipagpustáhan 35silà ŋ dalawà kay Hwàn.
Sinábi nilà ŋ nakáwin nya aŋ
párìʾ sa báyan at ihatid nyà sa
lugàr na kanila ŋ kinàdòroonàn
ŋayòn. Kuŋ itù y magawá nya,
bàbayáran sya ni Andrès at ni Dyégo naŋ limà ŋ daà
ŋ píso. Dátapuwat kuŋ hindí nya
magawàʾ, bàbayáran nya si Andrès at si
Dyégo naŋ isa ŋ daà ŋ 40píso.
Umáyon si Hwàn sa pustáha ŋ itò at
silà y naghiwá-hiwalày.
|
The two he was talking to were surprised, for they did
not think that a live man could be stolen without his knowing it, and,
to test Juan’s ability, the two made a bet with Juan. They told
him to steal the priest of the town and to bring him to the place where
they now were. If he succeeded in doing this, Andrés and Diego
would pay him five hundred pesos. But if he could not do it, he was to
pay Andrés and Diego one hundred pesos. Juan agreed to this bet,
and they parted.
|
|
Si Hwàn ay
napatúŋu sa báyan at pinakibalitáan nya
kuŋ saàn
nàtìtirà aŋ párèʾ.
Naŋ màláman nya itò ay nagisìp sya
naŋ paraà
ŋ gágawin nyà na pagnákaw sa
párèʾ. Sya y pumásuk na alílaʾ sa pári ŋ itò. Sa
kanya ŋ pagkàpaalíla ŋ itò ay
nàkilála nya aŋ maŋa ugáli naŋ
páreʾ. Isà sa kanya ŋ ugáliʾ na
hindí nabàbáliʾ káylan màn ay
aŋ pagdadasàl naŋ rosáriyo sa harapàn
5naŋ
isa ŋ poòn. Aŋ poò ŋ itò ay
nayàyárì naŋ káhoy, at itò y
si Saŋ-Hwàn. Aŋ
lakì naŋ poò ŋ itò ay
kasiŋpantày naŋ isa ŋ táo.
Aŋ ginawá
ni Hwàn ay nagpagawá sya sa isa ŋ mandurúkit
naŋ isa ŋ poò ŋ
gáya rin nitò, dátapuwat hukày at wala
ŋ lamàn 10aŋ loòb. Aŋ bútas na
itò sa loòb naŋ katawàn naŋ poò
ŋ itò ay maàári ŋ sootàn naŋ isa
ŋ táo. Naŋ mayárì na aŋ poò
ŋ pagawá ni Hwàn,
ay pinalitan nyà aŋ poò ŋ si
Saŋ-Hwàn na túnay naárì naŋ
párèʾ.
|
Juan went to the town and found out by inquiry where the
priest lived. When he had found this out, he figured out the plan he
would pursue in stealing the priest. He entered the priest’s
household as a servant. During his stay as a servant he became
acquainted with the habits of the priest. One of his habits, from which
he never deviated, was praying a rosary before the image of a saint.
The image was made of wood, and it represented Saint John. The size of
this image was equal to that of a man. Juan had a carver make an image
just like this one, but with an opening, and hollow inside. This
opening inside the body of the image of the saint was such that a man
could enter it. When the image which Juan had had made was
ready, he replaced with it the image of Saint John which belonged to
the priest.
|
|
Isa ŋ
hápun bágu dumatìŋ aŋ orasyòn ay
kumúha sya naŋ 15isa ŋ sáko
naŋ bigàs at napaloòb sya sa loòb naŋ
sànto ŋ ipinagawá nya. Pagkahápon naŋ párìʾ
itò y pumaroòn sa kwàrto ŋ kanya ŋ pinagdàdasalàn
úpaŋ magrosáryo. Naŋ
magkákalahatí na
aŋ kanya ŋ pagdadasàl at kátaon namà
ŋ naŋàŋáwit na si Hwàn sa pagkátayòʾ, ay
nagsalità ito: “Ihintú mu nà,
Párì 20Lúkas, aŋ iyo ŋ pagdadasàl.
Ako y pinàparíto sa iyò úpaŋ
ihatìd kità sa láŋit.”
|
One afternoon before prayers he took a rice-sack and
went into the inside of the saint he had had made. When the priest had
eaten supper he went into the room in which he prayed, to say a rosary.
When he was halfway through his prayers, and just about as Juan was
getting tired of standing up, the latter spoke: “Cease your
praying, Father Lucas. I have been sent here to conduct you to
Heaven.”
|
|
Naŋ úna ay siniglàn naŋ
tákot aŋ páreʾ, dátapuwat
inakálà nya ŋ
aŋ kanya ŋ poòn ay nagmìmilágro at totoo
ŋà ŋ sinúsundú sya úpaŋ ihatìd sa
kalaŋitàn.
25Sa kanyà ŋ hindí
pagkibòʾ ay nagsalità ŋ mulí si
Hwàn naŋ ganitò:
“Marámi nà aŋ kabànála ŋ
iyù ŋ ginawàʾ. Matagàl ka naŋ namùmúhay naŋ
mabábaʾ, at dáhil díto y
nàtàtaàn sa iyò aŋ lahàt naŋ kaginhawáhan sa
láŋit. Sumáma ka sa ákin at iháhatid
kità.”
|
At first the priest was filled with fear, but then he
thought that his saint was doing a miracle and was really calling for
him in order to take him to Heaven. As he did not say anything, Juan
again spoke as follows: “Many are the works of piety which you
have done. You have been patient in living a lowly life, therefore all
the joys of Heaven have been reserved for you. Come with me, and I
shall conduct you.”
|
|
30Isinagòt naŋ páreʾ:
“Papáno aŋ gàgawin kò ŋ
pagsáma sa iyò?
Akù y matandá na at hindí ako
makalàlákad mulà díto sa lúpaʾ
haŋgàŋ sa láŋit.”
|
The priest answered: “How shall I manage to come
with you? I am old and cannot walk from here on earth as far as
Heaven.”
|
|
Isinagòt
namàn ni Hwàn: “Yòn ay hwag mù ŋ
alalahánin. Máy-ron
ako ŋ isa ŋ sáko. Sumilìd ka díto at
pàpasanin kità sa 35pagpuntà sa
láŋit.”
|
Juan answered: “Never you mind that, I have a bag
here. Get into it and I will carry you on my way to Heaven.”
|
|
At
pagkàsábi nya nitò y iniladlad nyà aŋ
sáko naŋ bigàs. Pagkásilid naŋ páreʾ ay
tinalía ŋ mahigpìt ni Hwàn aŋ
sáko. Lumabàs sya sa
loòb naŋ poòn at pinasan nyà si
Párì Lúkas patúŋo sa báhay na kanya ŋ
pinagtipanàn sa dalawa ŋ kaybígan. 40Tiwalà ŋ
tiwalá si Párì Lúkas na sya y
papuntà sa láŋit, kanyàʾ walá sya
ŋ kibòʾ sa loòb naŋ sáko.
|
When he had said this, he spread out the rice-sack. When
the priest had got into it, Juan tied the bag tightly. He got out from
inside the image and carried Father Lucas on his shoulder toward the
house where he had his appointment with his two friends. Father Lucas
really believed that he was going to Heaven, and so he staid still in
the sack.
|
|
Dátapwat,
naŋ nagbàbátis na si Hwàn sa isa ŋ
mabábaw na ílog, ay inakálà nya ŋ sya y
nàlòlóko lámaŋ at hindí sa
láŋit aŋ punta
nilà.
|
However, when Juan was wading through a shallow river,
it occurred to him that he was being fooled and that they were not
going to Heaven at all.
|
|
Kanyà itinanùŋ nya kay Hwàn:
“Anu ŋ ílog itò, at bákit táyo dápat tumawìd
naŋ ílog sa pagpuntà sa
láŋit?”
|
Therefore he asked Juan: “What river is this, and
why must we cross a river on the way to Heaven?”
|
|
5Isinagòt ni Hwàn: “Sssst! Hwag
kà ŋ maíŋay! Itò y ílog naŋ Hòrdan.”
|
Juan answered: “Shhh! Don’t make any noise!
This is the river Jordan.”
|
|
Aŋ
párì ay nagtahàn naŋ
pagsasalitàʾ. Ipinatúloy ni Hwàn aŋ
paglákad.
Naŋ sya y
pumápanhik nà sa báhay na kanila ŋ
tagpúan, 10nàpagúlat na mulìʾ aŋ
páreʾ, at tumanùŋ sya ŋ mulìʾ:
“Anu ŋ hagdánan
itò? Ganito bà aŋ hitsúra naŋ
hagdána ŋ papuntà sa láŋit?”
|
The priest desisted from speaking. Juan kept on walking.
When he was already going up into the house that was their place of
meeting, the priest was again surprised and again asked: “What
stairway is this? Is this the way the staircase of Heaven
looks?”
|
|
“Sinábi ko nà sa iyò at hwag
kà ŋ maíŋay”, aŋ isinagòt ni
Hwàn, “Ito
ŋàʾ aŋ hagdána ŋ paakyàt sa
láŋit.”
|
“I have told you already that you must not make
any noise,” answered Juan, “This is the stairway that leads
to Heaven.”
|
|
15Naŋ mápanhik nà silà sa
báhay ay sinalúboŋ silà ni Dyégo
at ni Andrès. Inilapàg
ni Hwàn aŋ kanya ŋ dalà, at sinábi nya
sa dalawà: “Dala ko
ríto aŋ iniyútos ninyo sa áki ŋ
nakáwin. Dala ba ninyò aŋ lima ŋ daa ŋ
píso?”
|
When they had come up into the house, they were met by
Diego and Andrés. Juan dropped his burden and said to them:
“I have brought here what you told me to steal. Have you brought
the five hundred pesos?”
|
|
Aŋ dalawà
y hindí naniwála ŋ agàd. Kanyàʾ
aŋ ginawá nila 20y binútas
nilà aŋ sáko at sinílip nilà aŋ
lamàn. Sa loòb ay nàkíta nila aŋ úlo naŋ
párìʾ na may satsàt. Kanyàʾ
iniyabòt nila kay Hwàn aŋ lima ŋ daa ŋ
píso, at sila ŋ lahàt ay nanáog
pagdáka. Iníwan
nilà aŋ páreʾ úpaŋ sya ay
magpakawalàʾ sa kanya ŋ saríle.
|
The other two did not believe him at once. So what they
did was to make a hole in the bag and peep at the
contents. In it they saw the head of the priest with the tonsure.
Accordingly they handed Juan the five hundred pesos and they all
quickly left the house. They abandoned the priest, leaving him to get
free as best he could.
|
|
31. Aŋ paŋhuhúli naŋ maŋa
uŋgòʾ.
|
31. How monkeys are
caught.
|
|
25Hindí bihíraʾ sa maŋa
gúbat na màtagpuàn aŋ malalakì ŋ
káwal naŋ maŋa
uŋgòʾ. Kuŋ walà ŋ armàs
aŋ isà ŋ nàpápasa kanila ŋ
lugàr, silà y mababagsìk, at may
paŋánib na patayìn nilà aŋ táo ŋ kanila ŋ
màpagkalipumpunàn. Silà kuŋ
nagàgálit ay
nagsìsipanáog sa maŋa púnù naŋ
káhoy at pinagtùtulùŋ-tulúŋa
30ŋ kinákagat aŋ táo ŋ
násàsa kapaŋyaríhan nilà. Dáhil
díto aŋ isa ŋ táo ŋ naglálakad sa
maŋa gúbat na marámi ŋ uŋgòʾ
ay hindí
magpàpabáya ŋ magdalà naŋ barìl.
Aŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ kuŋ pinùputukan nà naŋ barìl ay
wala ŋ tákot. Karamíhan ay hindí nagtàtakbúhan,
dátapuwat tinìtiŋnan nilà aŋ
pinaŋgàgalíŋan naŋ 35íŋay at
naŋ asò. Aŋ maŋa dinàratnan namàn
naŋ bála ay sinásaŋga itò naŋ kanya ŋ kamày,
pára ŋ sumásaŋga sa isa ŋ pukòl
lámaŋ.
Kanyàʾ aŋ maŋa pálad nilà ay
nàbùbútas dìn naŋ bála kuŋ silà y tamaàn.
|
In the jungle one not rarely meets with large
herds of monkeys. When the one who comes into their haunts is unarmed,
there is danger of their killing the man whom they overpower by their
numbers. When angry, they climb down from the trees and all bite at the
man who is in their power. Therefore a man who is going into jungles
where there are many monkeys will not neglect to carry a gun. When the
monkeys hear the noise of the gun, they are unafraid. Most of them do
not run away, but look at the place where the noise and smoke come
from. Those who are reached by a bullet try to ward it off with their
hand, like one who is warding off a mere throw. Therefore, when they
are shot, their palms too are pierced by the bullet.
|
|
Hindí
bihíraʾ aŋ maŋa táo y
naŋhùhúle naŋ buhày na
uŋgòʾ 40úpaŋ kanila ŋ aliláin at
ipagbilì sa maŋa taga iba t ibà ŋ lupaìn
na
nagsìsipuntà sa Filipínas. Aŋ
paŋhuhúle naŋ buhày na uŋgòʾ
ay hindí
naŋàŋailáŋan naŋ malakì ŋ
págod, dátapuwat aŋ paraàn naŋ paghúle sa kanila ay isà
ŋ paŋlolóko lámaŋ sa kanilà. Ito
ŋ sumúsunòd ay isa ŋ halimbáwà
naŋ paghúle sa kanilà.
|
Not infrequently people catch live monkeys, so as to
domesticate them and sell them to the various foreigners who come to
the Philippines. The catching of live monkeys does not involve much
labor, for the method of catching them is simply to trick them.
|
|
5Kuŋ aŋ isa ŋ táo ay íbig
humúle naŋ uŋgòʾ, karanyúan ay
naglùlútoʾ o
nagpàpalúto sya naŋ kakanìn, at itò y
hinàhalúan o
pinahàhalúan niya naŋ balasìŋ. Aŋ
balasìŋ ay isa ŋ butò naŋ haláman na nakalálasìŋ o
nakapagáantòk naŋ malálim na antòk
sa maŋa háyop na
makàkáin. Gayon dìn ginàgámit
itò sa paŋhuhúle 10naŋ isdá sa
ílog. Pagkalútò naŋ kakanìn itò
y dinádala naŋ táo sa lugàr na
kinàdòroonàn naŋ káwal naŋ
maŋa uŋgòʾ. Dátapuwat kuŋ itò y ilagay nyà naŋ
mahúsay sa lúpàʾ aŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ ay hindí
magsìsipanáog úpaŋ kumáin.
Hinìhinálà nilà na aŋ kakanì ŋ iyòn ay páin
lámaŋ sa kanilà úpaŋ silà y
hulíhin o 15patayìn. Dáhil díto aŋ
ginágawa naŋ táo ay nagtàtakut-takútan
pagkátanaw nyà sa
maŋa uŋgòʾ, at sya y nagtátakbò na
súnoŋ aŋ
biláo naŋ kakanì ŋ may balasìŋ. Sa
kanya ŋ pagtakbò ay nagdàdapa-dapáan syà, at
dáhil díto y aŋ súnuŋ nya ŋ
kakanìn ay
nàpàpalagpàk at nàsàsábog sa
lúpaʾ. Kuŋ itù y maŋyári nà,
20ipinatùtúloy din nyà aŋ
kanya ŋ pagtakbò, at sya y
naŋúŋublè sa
isa ŋ lugàr, úpaŋ tanawìn nya aŋ
pagkakàínan naŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ. Pagkàkíta naŋ
maŋa uŋgòʾ sa patakbò ŋ
pagalìs naŋ táo at pagkákubli nitò, silà y
nagsìsipanáug sa maŋa
púno-ŋ-káhoy at
nagsìsipagagawàn naŋ kakanìn.
Nagkàkàdagàn-dagàn silà sa 25pagaagawàn, at lubhà ŋ
malakì aŋ íŋay, sapagkàt aŋ
báwat isa ŋ káwal naŋ uŋgò ay
máy-roo ŋ limà ŋ daàn o isà
ŋ líbo aŋ bílaŋ. Pagkakáin nilà hindí
nalàláon at sinúsumpoŋ silà naŋ
antòk, nagsìsipaŋhínaʾ at hindí
makaakyàt sa káhoy. Isa ŋ nakàtàtawa
ŋ panoorìn aŋ
maŋa uŋgò ŋ itò, matandàʾ at
bátàʾ, ay
naŋàtàtaluŋkò 30sa lúpaʾ at
nagsìsipagyukayòk báwat isà. Aŋ
ibà ŋ hindí nagkapálad na makàágaw naŋ
kakanìn ay nagsísiyakyàt sa
púno-ŋ-káhoy at
pinanónood aŋ kanila ŋ maŋa lasìŋ na
kasamahàn. Pagaanyòʾ naŋ ganitò naŋ
maŋa uŋgòʾ, aŋ táo ŋ
nàkùkublì ay saká pa lámaŋ lumàlápit
at isa-isà ŋ sinùsuŋgabàn aŋ
maŋa natùtúlug 35na uŋgòʾ.
Hindí maláo ŋ panahòn aŋ pagubrà
naŋ balasìŋ na
itò, at aŋ maŋa uŋgò y
nagsìsihúsay pagkaraàn naŋ ilà ŋ
áraw.
|
When one wants to catch monkeys, one usually cooks or
has cooked some sweetmeats, and into these one mixes or has
mixed some balasing. Balasing is the seed of a plant
which intoxicates or puts into a deep sleep the animals which eat it.
It is used also in catching fish in rivers. When these sweetmeats have
been cooked, the man carries them to where the herd of monkeys is.
However, if he should place it carefully on the ground, the monkeys
would not climb down to eat it. They suspect that these sweetmeats are
only a bait for them, that they may be caught or killed. Therefore what
the man does is to pretend that he is frightened and when he sees the
monkeys, he starts running, carrying on his head the tray of drugged
sweetmeats. While running he pretends to take a fall on his face, so
that the sweetmeats he is carrying on his head fall down and are
scattered over the ground. When this happens, he keeps on running just
the same, and hides somewhere or other to watch the monkeys eat. When
the monkeys see the man running away, and when he is hidden, they climb
down from the trees and all start grabbing the sweetmeats. They all
crowd on top of one another in their greed, and the noise is very
great, for each herd of monkeys is about five hundred or a thousand
strong. When they have eaten it is not long before they are attacked by
sleepiness. They get weak and cannot climb into the trees. It is a
laughable sight to see these monkeys, old and young, squatting on the
ground and nodding, everyone of them. The ones who did not succeed in
grabbing any sweetmeats climb up into the trees and look down at their
drunken companions. When the monkeys are in this state, and not before,
does the man who is hidden come up and take the sleeping monkeys one by
one. The effect of the drug is not of long duration, and the monkeys
get well after a few days.
|
|
Aŋ ikalawà ŋ karanyúa ŋ
gawìn sa paŋhuhúli naŋ uŋgòʾ
ay aŋ pagpapáin sa
kanila naŋ nyòg. Aŋ isa ŋ boò ŋ
nyòg ay nilàlagyan 40naŋ bútas.
Aŋ lakì naŋ bútas na itò ay hustò
lámaŋ na màipásuk naŋ uŋgòʾ
aŋ kanya ŋ kamày kuŋ walà ŋ
táŋan. Sa loòb
naŋ báo naŋ nyòg ay inilálagay aŋ
isa ŋ pirásu-ŋ-lamàn
naŋ nyùg, at aŋ lahàt na itò y
inilálagay sa lugàr naŋ maŋa
uŋgòʾ. Aŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ ay
magustúhin sa nyòg, at pagkàkíta
nilà díto ay
dinùdúkot nilà aŋ lamà ŋ
nása loòb naŋ báo. Kuŋ
masuŋgabàn na namàn nilà aŋ lamàn
naŋ nyòg, aŋ kanila ŋ kamày ay hindí nila màilabàs sa
bútas, ní íbig namàn silà ŋ
bitíwan aŋ 5lamàn naŋ nyòg. Dáhil
díto silà y pára ŋ nakapaŋàw at
paglápit naŋ táo
ŋ maŋhuhúle ay hindí sila makaalìs,
sapagkàt aŋ niyog namàn ay mabigàt at kuŋ mínsan
ay máy-roo ŋ pabigàt. Kanyàʾ paglápit naŋ
maŋhuhúle, ay wala ŋ hírap nya ŋ
nasùsuŋgabàn aŋ maŋa uŋgòʾ o matsìŋ na
naŋàpàpaŋàw.
|
Another common way of catching monkeys is to use
cocoanuts as bait. A hole is made in an unopened cocoanut. The size of
this hole is just large enough for a monkey to put in his hand when it
is not holding anything. Inside the cocoanut-shell is placed a piece of
the meat of the cocoanut, and the whole thing is placed in a spot where
there are monkeys. Monkeys like cocoanut, and when they see it, they
grasp the meat that is inside the shell. But when they have hold of the
cocoanut-meat, they can no longer take their hand out through the
opening, but they will not let go of the cocoanut-meat. Consequently
they are as though in stocks, and when the man who is catching them
approaches, they cannot get away, for the cocoanuts are heavy and
sometimes are weighted in addition. So when the catcher comes up, he is
able without difficulty to capture the handcuffed monkeys, grown or
young.
|
|
1032. Aŋ
fiyèsta ni Saŋ-Hwàn.
|
32. The festival of Saint
John.
|
|
Aŋ
abéynte-kwátru naŋ Húnyo ay sya ŋ
áraw na kapyestáhan ni
Saŋ-Hwàn, at itò y ipinagdìdíwaŋ
sa maŋa bayàn-bayàn sa lalawígan naŋ Bulakàn. Sa
bwàn naŋ Húnyo ay kasalukúyan aŋ ulàn at mapútik. Aŋ
paniwálà naŋ maŋa táo si
Saŋ-Hwàn 15ay sya ŋ sànto ŋ
nagpàpaulàn, dáhil díto y maibigìn
sa túbig at pútik. Kanyàʾ aŋ maŋa
pagdiríwaŋ na ginágawàʾ sa kanya ŋ kaarawàn ay lubhà
ŋ malakì aŋ pagkáiba sa pagdiríwaŋ
na ginágawa sa
kaarawàn naŋ ibà ŋ sànto. Sa báya
ŋ malalápit sa dágat kuŋ bwàn naŋ Húnyo
ay bumábahàʾ, at aŋ túbig ay 20umàáhon sa báyan. Sa maŋa
báya ŋ malaláyoʾ sa dágat ay
lubhà ŋ maulàn
dìn, at karanyúwa y aŋ maŋa pagbahà
ŋ itò at pagulàn ay nàtàtaòn sa kaarawàn ni
Saŋ-Hwàn. Aŋ maŋa táo ŋ kasáli
sa pagdiríwaŋ ay
nagsìsipagbasàʾ sa bahàʾ o sa
ulàn. Sa maŋa báyan naŋ Malólos at Hagúnoy
kuŋ nàtàtaòn aŋ fyèsta ŋ
itò sa 25isa ŋ bahà ŋ malakì,
hálos lahàt naŋ táo ay naglúlublob sa
túbig o kayà y nagsìsipamaŋkàʾ.
Kuŋ hindí namàn bahàʾ, aŋ maŋa
táo y
nagsìsipaglibòt lámaŋ sa ulàn.
Marámi ŋ taga búkid at taga báriyo ay nagsìsipagpalimòs
sa kaarawà ŋ itò. Karamíhan sa kanilà ay maŋa bátaʾ o
kayà y maŋa binátaʾ. Bihíra ŋ
máy 30maŋa babáye.
Paŋkat-paŋkàt sila ŋ
nagsìsipagpalimòs, at báwat isa ŋ paŋkàt ay máy maŋa
kasáma ŋ músiku ŋ buŋbòŋ.
Aŋ maŋa hindí
nagsísitugtòg aŋ katuŋkúlan ay
kumantà o kayà y sumayàw. Sila ŋ lahàt ay uwalà ŋ
pamamároʾ hálos, gáya naŋ maŋa
Igoróte, dátapuwat
aŋ boò ŋ katawàn mulá sa paà
haŋgàŋ úlo, patì maŋa 35matà
at taíŋa, ay nàkùkulapúlan naŋ
pútek.
|
The twenty-fourth of June is the festival of Saint
John, and it is celebrated in the various towns of the province of
Bulacán. In the month of June there is usually rain and mud. The
people believe that Saint John is the saint who makes the rain fall,
and therefore is fond of water and mud. Hence the celebrations
performed on his day are very different from those performed on the
days of other saints. In the towns near the sea there are floods in the
month of June and the water comes up into the town. In the towns
farther from the sea it is also very rainy, and usually these floods
and rains fall on the day of Saint John. The people who take part in
the celebration get themselves drenched in the flood or in the rain. In
the towns of Malolos and Hagúnoy, when this holiday falls into a
time of large flood, almost all the people get into the water or else
go canoeing. If there is no flood, the people walk about in the rain.
Many people from the country and the suburbs go about collecting alms
on this holiday. Most of them are boys or young men; rarely are there
any women. In separate groups they go about collecting alms, and each
group has with it a band that plays on bamboo instruments. Those who do
not play are supposed to have the task of singing or dancing. All of
them are almost without clothing, like Igorots, but their whole body,
from head to foot, including even the eyes and ears, is caked over with
mud.
|
|
Aŋ maŋa
paŋkàt na itò ay tumàtáwag sa
bahay-bahày. Naghíhintó sila sa harapàn naŋ báhay, at
díto y tumútugtog silà o kayà y nagsìsikantà o
nagsásayàw. Aŋ karanyúa ŋ kanila ŋ
kantahìn ay úkol sa nagìŋ pamumúhay ni
Saŋ-Hwàn o kayà y naŋ 40iba ŋ sànto
ŋ kaybígan nitò. Sa kanila ŋ
pagtutugtúgan aŋ kanila ŋ áyos ay makahiléra ŋ
pabilòg, kuŋ mínsan ay nakatayòʾ,
kuŋ
mínsan ay nakataluŋkòʾ, o kayà y
nakaluhòd. Kuŋ máy-roo ŋ nagkákantà o sumásayàw,
itò y násàsa loòb naŋ bílog
naŋ maŋa mànunugtòg, at doòn nya
ginágawà aŋ kanya ŋ pagkantà o pagsayàw. Pagkaraàn naŋ
dalawà o tatlò ŋ tugtúgan, kantáhan,
5o
sàyáwan, sila y nagsìsipaghintòʾ at
sabày-sabày na
nagsìsipaŋhiŋìʾ naŋ limòs sa maŋa táo ŋ
nanúnood sa kanilà. Kuŋ sila y hindí limusàn, kumùkúha
silà naŋ pútik sa kanila ŋ katawàn
at pinúpukul nilà
aŋ maŋa táo ŋ mararámot.
Aŋ boò
ŋ maghápun ay inùúbus nilà sa
ganitò ŋ pagdiríwaŋ. 10Aŋ maŋa
maŋlilímos na itò ay lubhà ŋ
marámi rìn, kanyàʾ silà y nakatùtúluŋ na
magpasiglà sa báyan káhit na lubhà ŋ
maulàn.
|
These groups go calling from house to house. They stop
in front of a house and there they play music or sing or dance. They
usually sing about the life of Saint John or of some other saint who
was a friend of his. While their music is playing, their order is in
single file in a circle, sometimes standing, sometimes squatting or
kneeling. When there is a singer or dancer, he is within the circle of
musicians and there performs his singing or dancing. After two or three
pieces of music, songs, or dances they stop and all go round asking
alms of the people who are watching them. If they receive no alms, they
take mud from their body and throw it at the stingy
people. They spend the whole day in such celebration. As these
alms-gatherers are very numerous, they help to make the town gay, even
though it is very rainy.
|
|
Sa maŋa
pagbabaŋkáan namàn ay hindí
bihíràʾ aŋ magkalunòd aŋ maŋa
táo. Kanyà aŋ ugáli ŋ itò ay
unti-untì ŋ nawáwalàʾ. 15Gayon dìn sa maŋa panahò ŋ
itò aŋ maŋa táo y nagígiŋ kuríput at bihíra ŋ
maglimòs. Kanyàʾ aŋ maŋa
maŋhihiŋí naŋ limùs sa kaarawàn ni
Saŋ-Hwàn ay untì-untì ŋ
nawáwalàʾ.
|
When there is canoeing it is not uncommon for people to
get drowned. Consequently this custom is gradually disappearing.
Moreover, in these days people are getting stingy and rarely give alms.
Hence the gatherers of alms on the festival of Saint John are gradually
disappearing.
|
|
33. Aŋ maŋa paŋiŋílin
naŋ maŋa kamagának naŋ isa ŋ
namatày.
|
33. Family celebrations
after a death.
|
|
Aŋ
isà ŋ aŋkà ŋ namàmatayàn ay
hindìʾ aŋ kanila ŋ loòb 20at káluluwa
lámaŋ aŋ nagtátamu naŋ hírap,
kuŋ hindìʾ patì aŋ bulsà rìn nilà. Itù y
dahilàn sa lubhà ŋ malalakì ŋ
dámi naŋ ginùgúgul naŋ
namàmatayàn sa pagdadáos naŋ
sarì-sári ŋ kaugaliàn.
|
A family that has suffered a loss by death suffers
not only in its mind and soul, but also in its purse. This is on
account of the great expense borne by the bereaved ones in conforming
with various customs.
|
|
Sa áraw naŋ pagkamatày naŋ isa
ŋ táo, sa aŋkàn nitò ay 25marámi ŋ
lubhàʾ aŋ nagsìsidálaw, at aŋ
maŋa nagsìsidálaw namà ŋ itò ay hindí
nasìsyahàn naŋ pakikipagdalamhátì
lámaŋ sa kamaganákan naŋ namatày, dátapuwat silà y
nagtútumirà sa báhay naŋ namatayàn. Dáhil díto
aŋ aŋkàn naŋ namatày ay
napìpilíta ŋ
maghandá naŋ paŋpakáin sa maŋa
dálaw. Karanyúwa y hindí 30inilílibiŋ
agàd aŋ patày, dátapuwat
ibinùbúrol múna ŋ dalawà o tatlo ŋ áraw mulá sa
pagkalagùt naŋ hiniŋà. Sa maŋa áraw
na itò áraw-gabì ay walà ŋ
patìd aŋ dálaw naŋ maŋa táo.
Karamíhan ay maŋa kamagának at ibà y
maŋa kaybígan, kápit-báhay, o ibà
ŋ kakilála sa báyan. Kuŋ aŋ namatày
ay isa ŋ táo 35ŋ
marámi ŋ kaybígan o kamaganákan sa iba ŋ
báyan sila màn ay dumàdálaw rìn, at silà y
dápat na bigyàn naŋ tìráhan at
pagkáin naŋ aŋkàn naŋ namatày.
Itò y ganitò sapagkàt sa maŋa bayàn-bayàn sa provìnsiya ay
walà ŋ báhay-tùlúyan.
Sa pagpapakáin
sa marámi ŋ dálaw na itò hindí
bihíra ŋ 40nakaùúbus silà naŋ
kabyàk na báka at ilà ŋ túpa,
kambèŋ, at hindí mabílaŋ na maŋa
manòk. Aŋ kosinéro karanyúwa y upahàn,
at aŋ malalápit na
kamagának naŋ namatày ay
nagsìsitúluŋ na
maglútoʾ. Dáhil díto sa báhay naŋ
namatayàn aŋ lugàr na kinàbùburúlan naŋ patày
ay tahímik na tahímik at káhit na marámi
5ŋ
táo aŋ nàròroòn, pabulòŋ
lámaŋ kuŋ silà y magsàlitáan.
Dátapuwat sa kainàn at
lutuàn aŋ íŋay ay hindí
karanyúan. Isa t isà y
nagùútos sa maŋa alílaʾ, may
naghùhúgas naŋ piŋgàn o kayà y maŋa palayòk, may
nagpàpakintàb naŋ maŋa tinidòr at kutsílyo, may
nagháhandàʾ sa lamésa, at iba pà. Sa
kusínà namàn 10aŋ sagitsìt
naŋ kawáleʾ ay wala ŋ lubày. Aŋ
pagtatadtàd naŋ karnè ay wala ŋ patìd at
aŋ tinìg naŋ kosinéro at kanya ŋ alagàd ay sya na lámaŋ
nàrìrinìg.
|
On the day when someone has died very many people call
on his family, and these visitors do not content themselves with
condoling with the dead person’s family, but make a long stay in
the house of mourning. Consequently the bereaved family is compelled to
serve food to the visitors. Usually the dead person is not buried at
once, but is first placed in state for two or three days from the time
when he ceased to breathe. During these days people’s visits stop
neither by day nor by night. Most of them are relatives and others are
friends, neighbors, and other acquaintances in town. If the deceased
had many friends or relatives in other towns, they too come to visit,
and they have to be given board and lodging by the dead person’s
family. This is because in the small towns in the provinces there are
no hotels. In feeding all these guests they often use up half a cow,
several sheep and goats, and innumerable chickens. The chef is usually
hired, and the near relatives of the deceased help with the cooking.
For this reason in the house of death the place where the deceased is
lying in state is very quiet, and even when many people are there, when
they talk it is only in whispers. But in the dining-room and kitchen
the noise is extraordinary. Everyone is giving orders to the servants,
some are washing dishes or pots, some are polishing
knives and forks, some are serving at the table, and so on. In the
kitchen the sputtering of the frying-pans never stops, and one can hear
only the voices of the chef and his assistants.
|
|
Dátapuwat sa
isa ŋ silìd namàn naŋ báhay ay
doòn nàròroòn at nàlùlugmòk sa
pagdadalamháteʾ aŋ maŋa aŋkàn
naŋ namatày. 15Sila y
nagsísiyàk naŋ úbus-lakàs at kuŋ
mínsa y nagdúduklày-duklày silà naŋ kuŋ ano-anò aŋ
maŋyàyári sa kanila ŋ pamumúhay dahilàn sa pagpánaw naŋ
namatày.
|
But in one chamber of the house stays the immediate
family of the deceased and is plunged in grief. They all cry as hard as
they can and from time to time blurt out questions as to what will
happen to them because of the departure of the one who has died.
|
|
Kuŋ
mayáman aŋ namatày, itò y
ipinadàdápit sa párèʾ at iniháhatid sa simbáhan.
Pagdatìŋ doòn sa simbáhan
binèbendisyunàn 20naŋ
párèʾ aŋ patày at pagkatápos ay
iniháhatid dìn nya sa
lìbíŋan. Aŋ lahàt naŋ maŋa
dálaw ay kasáma sa paglilibìŋ na itò at kadalasà y
nàsàsakay silà sa maŋa karumáta.
Aŋ maŋa karumáta
ŋ itò namàn ay upahàn, líban na
lámaŋ sa ilà ŋ árì naŋ
maŋa dálaw.
|
If the deceased is wealthy, a priest comes to get him
and escorts him to the church. Arriving at the church, the body is
blessed by the priest and after this the priest escorts it also to the
cemetery. All the visitors are present at the burial, and usually they
ride in carriages. These carriages are hired, except for a few which
belong to some of the visitors.
|
|
25Pagkálibiŋ naŋ patày aŋ
maŋa dálaw na taga iba ŋ báyan ay doon dìn aŋ wèʾ sa
báhay naŋ namatày. Kadalasàn silà y
nagsìsialìs
agàd, dátapuwat kuŋ magkàbihíraʾ
ay silà y nagtítira na
tatlu ŋ áraw úpaŋ makàsále sa
pagtatatlo-ŋ-gabè. Aŋ tatlù ŋ gabè ay idinàdáos sa
báhay naŋ namatày. Díto ay
dumàdálaw 30aŋ maŋa kamaganákan at silà
y nagsísipagdasàl. Sa pagdadasàl na itò ay aŋ maŋa matatandá
lámaŋ aŋ kasáli, at aŋ maŋa
binátà at
dalága ay nagsìsipagbugtúŋan namàn.
Aŋ ganitò ŋ paŋiŋílin ay ginágawa sa
loòb naŋ tatlu ŋ gabè. Sa katapusà
ŋ gabè karanyúa y
lubhà ŋ marámi aŋ táo, at aŋ
handàʾ ay malakì 35káy sa dalawà ŋ gabì
ŋ nagdaàn. Marámi rìn namàn sa
maŋa nagsísidalò
aŋ nagbíbigay naŋ limùs sa namatayàn.
Karanyúwa y maŋa paŋpakáin sa maŋa
dálaw.
|
When the dead has been buried the guests who come from
other towns go along back to the house of mourning. Most commonly they
soon depart, but sometimes they stay three days, to take part in the
Three Nights’ Celebration. The Three Nights are celebrated in the
house of the deceased. At this time the relatives call and all pray
together. In this praying only the older people take part, and the
young men and young women tell each other riddles. These ceremonies are
performed during the Three Nights. On the last night there are usually
many people, and the entertaining is more elaborate than on the two
preceding nights. Many of those who come give presents to the bereaved
ones. Usually these are things to eat for the guests.
|
|
Sa maŋa aŋkà ŋ mahihírap
aŋ maŋa paŋiŋíli ŋ ito ay
ginágawá rìn,
dátapuwat aŋ pagdápit at paghahatìd
lámaŋ naŋ pári 40sa patày ay walàʾ. Sa
pagbebendisyòn naŋ patày aŋ isa ŋ
táo y makabàbáyad sa páreʾ naŋ
gustuhìn nyà. Aŋ pinakamúra ay aŋ pagbebendisyòn sa patày sa
pintúan lámaŋ naŋ simbáhan at sa sahìg
nàlàlapàg. Aŋ sumúsunòd ay
aŋ pagbebendisyòn naŋ patày sa
pintúan dìn, dátapuwat
nàpàpátuŋ lámaŋ aŋ
ataòl sa isa ŋ altàr. Aŋ maŋa mahahalagà ŋ
pagbebendisyòn ay ginágawàʾ sa tabì
naŋ altàr. Mulá sa isa ŋ daà ŋ
píso haŋgàŋ sa lima ŋ daàn aŋ
maŋa halagà nitò.
|
In poor families these ceremonies are also performed,
but the priest’s calling for and escorting the corpse does not
take place. For the blessing of the corpse one may pay the priest
whatever one desires. The cheapest thing is the blessing of the corpse
at the door of the church and placed on the ground. The next in order
is the blessing of the corpse also at the door of the church, but with
the coffin placed on an altar. The most expensive blessings are
performed right by the altar. The price of these is from one-hundred to
five-hundred pesos.
|
|
534. Aŋ
takbúhan sa Amerikáno.
|
34. Fleeing from the
Americans.
|
|
Aŋ maŋa
táo sa San-Migèl ay nagìŋ pára ŋ
maŋa káwal naŋ háyop na umìílag sa maŋa
pamáloʾ naŋ maŋa pastòl at
paŋhahábol naŋ maŋa áso ŋ
mababagsìk. Silà y lubhà ŋ maibigìn sa
katahimíkan at
kapayapaàn. Gayon dìn sila y lubhà ŋ
pàniwalaìn 10sa sabi-sabì, at
itò ŋ maŋa bágay na yitò ay sya ŋ
hindí ikinàpátag naŋ marámi sa
kanilà sa báyan sa panahòn naŋ maŋa
paghihìmagsíkan
lában sa Kastílaʾ at sa Amerikáno.
Totoò rìn namàn
na marámi sa kanilà ay naŋagsipagtakbò
dahilàn lámaŋ sa katakútan o kadwágan.
|
The people of San Miguel were like herds of
animals fleeing before the whips of the herdsmen and the pursuit of
savage dogs. They are very fond of peace and quiet. Also they are very
credulous toward hearsay, and these circumstances are what did not
allow most of them to stay at ease in the town during the time of the
revolutions against the Spaniards and the Americans. It is also true,
however, that many of them ran away merely from fright or
cowardice.
|
|
15Naŋ
maŋyári aŋ paghihìmagsíkan lában
sa Kastílaʾ naŋ taò ŋ isa ŋ líbo walu ŋ daàn at
siyàm na pu t ánim, akò y àápat na
taòn pa lámaŋ sa
gúlaŋ. Áyon sa sinábi sa ákin naŋ
áki ŋ nánay, kamì ay nagsipuntà sa Maynílaʾ
sa lugàr naŋ umáhon sa bundòk. Walá ako ŋ marámi
ŋ natàtandaàn naŋ maŋa naŋyári
sa panahò 20ŋ yaòn, kuŋ hindí aŋ
bágay naŋ ámi ŋ pagpuntà sa
estasyòn naŋ trèn. Pagdatìŋ sa Maynílaʾ
ay hindí kami nakapások sa loòb naŋ báyan kuŋ hindìʾ
may pahintúlot naŋ isa ŋ pinúnoʾ sa
báya ŋ iyòn.
|
When the revolution against the Spaniards of the year
1896 took place, I was only four years old. According to what my mother
has told me, we went to Manila instead of going up into the mountains.
I do not remember much of what happened at that time, except the fact
that we went to the railroad station. When we arrived at Manila we were
not able to enter the city unless we had a permit from an official of
this city.
|
|
Aŋ
sumúsunod na bágay na nátalàʾ sa
áki ŋ paŋalaála ay 25aŋ pagkátira
námin sa Bigaà, sa báhay naŋ isa ŋ
mànanaŋgòl na aŋ paŋála y si Don-Nasáryo.
Aŋ dahilàn naŋ ikinalípat námin sa báya ŋ itò ay
aŋ pagílag sa paglalabanàn naŋ maŋa
Katipúnan at maŋa Kastílaʾ sa
Maynílaʾ. Sa Bigaà ay maŋa sundálo
ŋ Tagálog sa kanila
ŋ pagsasánay sa pakikipaglában.
|
The next thing which has become fixed in my memory is
our stay in Bigaá, in the house of an attorney, whose name was
Don Nasario. We went to this town to escape the fighting of the forces
of the Katipunan and the Spaniards in Manila. In Bigaá were
Tagalog soldiers drilling to take part in the fighting.
|
|
30Hindí nalaúnan at kamì ay
nápasa báyan naŋ Bùstos. Aŋ báya ŋ itò ay
nasàsákup dìn sa maŋa panahò ŋ
iyòn naŋ maŋa Katipunéros. Aŋ báya ŋ
iyòn ay lubhà ŋ magandà dahilàn sa
sarì-sáre ŋ
hitsúra naŋ maŋa bágay-bágay na
nàkìkíta. Aŋ ílug ay lubha ŋ maláwak, aŋ
pasígan ay malápad, may maŋa buntòn 35naŋ
batò at buháŋin sa pasígan. Aŋ
ámi ŋ maŋa kaybíga ŋ tinulúyan ay
mababaìt na táo. Akò at aŋ áki ŋ
kapatìd na babáye ay
kanila ŋ paráti ŋ ipinalílibàŋ, at
aŋ paglilibàŋ na itò ay aŋ pagpapasísid naŋ páto sa
malínaw na túbig sa ílog.
|
A little later we went to the town of Bustos. This town
also was at that time in the hands of the Katipunan. This town is very
pretty because of the various aspect of the things one sees. The river
is very broad, the banks are wide, and on the banks are hills of stone
and sand. The friends with whom we stayed were kind people. They often
played with my sister and me, and the game was to make ducks dive in
the clear waters of the river.
|
|
Kuŋ anò aŋ naŋyári sa
maŋa paglalabanàn naŋ maŋa panaho ŋ
iyòn ay hindí ku nàalamàn, dahilàn
sa kaliitàn at kawalàn pa naŋ málay.
|
What took place in the fighting of those times I did not
find out, for I was still small and had not yet any understanding.
|
|
Naŋ
dumatìŋ aŋ takbúhan sa Amerikáno,
akò y may gúlaŋ na naŋ kauntìʾ, at
marámi akù ŋ natàtandaàn sa ámi
ŋ pagtakbò 5sa bundòk. Naŋ aŋ maŋa
Amerikáno ay nagsìsipanálo na lában sa maŋa sundálo ni
Aginàldo aŋ maŋa táo sa
báya-ŋ-San-Migèl ay
pinagsisiglàn naŋ tákot. Lumagánap sa
báyan aŋ balítaʾ na aŋ maŋa
Amerikáno ay maŋa táo ŋ salbáhe,
malulupìt, at mababagsìk at wala ŋ pìtágan sa káhit anu
pa màn. Itò y sigúru ŋ 10isa ŋ balíta
ŋ pakálat naŋ maŋa Kastílaʾ at
lálù na naŋ maŋa kúra sa
Filipínas.
Dáhil sa pagkatákot naŋ maŋa
táo sa maŋa Amerikáno hálus kami ŋ lahàt na namàmáyan
ay nagsipagbalùt at nagsiáhun sa bundòk. Kamì ay
nàtìtirà noòn sa báhay naŋ isa
ŋ áli naŋ áki 15ŋ nánay, at
doòn ay kasúno rìn námin aŋ
aŋkàn naŋ kúya naŋ áki ŋ nánay. Áki ŋ
natàtandaàn na máy-roò ŋ
mahigìt na sà m pu
ŋ áraw aŋ pagbabastáan at aŋ
paghahàkútan naŋ maŋa kasaŋkápan
námi ŋ
magkakasúnoʾ. Aŋ maŋa karitòn na
máy lúla ŋ
kasaŋkápan ay gabì kuŋ ipalákad,
úpaŋ aŋ maŋa kalabàw na 20humìhíla ay huwàg
magsisáyad sa kainítan naŋ áraw. Aŋ
maŋa karitòn ay
pùnúan haŋgàŋ sa ituktòk naŋ
káraŋ nitò at aŋ maŋa kalabàw ay lubhà ŋ
nahirápan sa paghíla naŋ mabibigàt na
lúlan. Naŋ walá
na ŋ nàtìtirà sa maŋa abúbot ay
kamì namà ŋ maŋa táo aŋ nagsilúlan sa karitòn
úpaŋ ihatìd sa bundòk.
|
When the flight from the Americans came, I was already a
little older, and I remember much of our flight to the mountains. When
the Americans had defeated the soldiers of Aguinaldo the people of San
Miguel were filled with terror. The report circulated in the town that
the Americans were wild people, cruel and fierce, and without respect
for anything. This no doubt was a rumor which the Spaniards caused to
be spread, and especially the Spanish priests in the Philippines.
Owing to people’s fear of the Americans,
almost all of us townspeople packed up our belongings and went up into
the mountains. We were living at that time in the house of an aunt of
my mother’s, and there dwelt with us also the family of my
mother’s oldest brother. I remember that the packing and hauling
of the goods of all of us who lived in the house took more than ten
days. The wagons laden with our goods were despatched at night, so that
the carabao that drew them should not get
exhausted in the heat of the sun. The wagons were filled up to the top
of the covering, and the carabao were much wearied by the drawing of
the heavy loads. When no belongings of ours were left, we ourselves got
into the wagon to be carried to the mountains.
|
|
25Aŋ lugàr na ámi ŋ
pinarunàn ay tinàtáwag na
Paà-ŋ-Bundòk, kalaháti-ŋ-áraw na lakárin
mulá sa Sibòl. Doòn aŋ dinatnàn námi ŋ titirhàn ay isa
ŋ kúbo lámaŋ na may atìp na kúgon
at lubhà ŋ
maliìt. Aŋ sahìg ay maŋa saŋà
naŋ káhoy na pinutúlan naŋ maŋa maliliìt na saŋà,
dátapuwat hindí makikínis ní 30hindí pantay-pantày. Gayon dìn
lubhà ŋ maliìt at pinàpások naŋ
háŋin at lamìg.
Ganoòn aŋ ámi ŋ tinirhàn na may ila
ŋ bwàn, sa lugàr naŋ báhay na
tablà naŋ áli naŋ áki ŋ
nánay.
|
The place we went to was called Paang-Bundóc,
half a day’s walk from Sibul Springs. The dwelling we came to
there was a mere hut with a roof of cugon-grass, and very small. The
floor consisted of branches of trees with the twigs cut off, but not
smooth or even. It was very small and was penetrated by wind and cold.
Such was the place we lived in for several months, instead of the frame
house of my mother’s aunt.
|
|
Doòn sa Paà-ŋ-Bundòk ay
nakátagpu kamì naŋ maràmi ŋ kababáyan na nagsiílag
dìn, at aŋ maŋa náhuli ŋ
nagsidatìŋ ay 35nagbalíta ŋ
aŋ lahàt naŋ táo sa báyan ay
naŋása bundok nà o kayà y naŋása
ibà ŋ báyan nà. Aŋ
báya-ŋ-San-Migèl ay nawalàʾ,
dátapuwat aŋ maŋa báhay ay sya
lámaŋ nàròroòn.
|
There in Paang-Bundóc there came to us many
fellow-townspeople who were also fleeing, and the last comers reported
that all the people of the town were by now in the mountains, or at any
rate gone, and only the houses were left.
|
|
Pagkaraàn naŋ ila ŋ bwà ŋ
pagtitirà námin sa Paà-ŋ-Bundòk ay lumípat kamì sa isa
ŋ lugàr na líhim. Aŋ lugàr na
iyòn ay 40isà ŋ kaiŋìn sa
kagubátan. Walà ŋ nakààalam ní
sínu man sa ámin
aŋ paŋálan naŋ lugàr, at aŋ
ibà ŋ nakààalàm ay inilíhim
na lubhàʾ,
úpaŋ hwag màpagalamàn naŋ iba ŋ
táo aŋ ámi ŋ kinàtàtagúan. Iyòn ay
paraàn naŋ paŋiŋílag hindí sa
kaáway lámaŋ, dátapuwat sa tulisàn at
magnanákaw dìn. Aŋ báhay na tinirhàn námin doòn ay
lubhà ŋ malakì, mahába ŋ
mahábaʾ sa ilálim
naŋ isà ŋ bubuŋàn. Aŋ
kabahayàn ay hináti naŋ magkakasiŋlakì
ŋ kwàrto. Máy-roo ŋ walò aŋ
bílaŋ nitò. Sa báwat 5kwàrto ay isà ŋ aŋkàn
aŋ nátirà. Díto ay máy-roon dì
ŋ ila ŋ bwàn aŋ
ámi ŋ ikinàpagtirà.
|
After several months’ stay at Paang-Bundóc
we went from there to a secret place. This place was a clearing in the
jungle. Not one of us was allowed to know the name of the place, and
those who knew it kept it very secret, so that our hiding-place should
not be known by any outsider. This was a way of escaping not only the
enemy, but also robbers and thieves. The house we lived in there was
very large, a very long building, all under one roof. The building was
cut up into rooms of equal size. The number of these was about eight.
In each room one family lived. Here too we were compelled to stay for
several months.
|
|
Naŋ
màlàlapit nà sa
báya-ŋ-San-Migèl aŋ maŋa Amerikáno,
nàbalitáan námin na aŋ maŋa táo
ŋ itò y hindí gáya naŋ maŋa sabì-sabè, kanyàʾ
umuntí naŋ umuntìʾ aŋ ámi ŋ
tákot sa kanilà. 10Dáhil díto y
umalìs kamì sa ámi ŋ malálim na
taguàn, at naparoòn
kamì sa Páhoʾ. Itò y isà ŋ
lugàr sa bundok dìn, dátapuwat malápit
naŋ kauntìʾ sa báyan. Díto y
lubhà ŋ marámi kamì ŋ dinatnàn
naŋ maŋa kababáyan at tagà iba t ibà
ŋ lugàr. Karamíhan sa kanilà ay máy
maŋa sakìt, dahilàn sa 15pagtitirà sa
bundòk. Díto nagkaroòn naŋ malakì
ŋ kagamitàn aŋ
maŋa gamòt na ipinaáhon ni Nánay sa
bundòk, at hindí iníwan sa báyan. Aŋ maŋa gamòt na
itò y árì ni Tátay at kanya ŋ iníwan sa pagkapatápun sa
kanyà naŋ maŋa kúra sa Holò. Isa ŋ umága máy-roo ŋ
tumáwag sa ámi ŋ báhay úpaŋ
bumilì naŋ 20gamòt. Hinánap ni Nánay aŋ
kahò ŋ kinàlàlagyàn naŋ
gamòt. Naŋ itò y
mabuksan nà ay nàkíta námin aŋ
isà ŋ áhas na nakaíkid at natùtúlog sa ibábaw naŋ
ipà na nàtàtábon sa maŋa bóte.
Malaki ŋ twàʾ naŋ ibà ŋ táo
ŋ nakàkíta, dátapuwat si Nánay ay
natákot lámaŋ.
Hindí nya nàlàláman aŋ
kahulugàn naŋ áhas 25na iyòn.
Pagkaraàn naŋ kàtwáan ay itinanùŋ
ni Nánay kuŋ anò aŋ dáhil at silà y
nagkàkàtwáan. Isinagòt nilà kay
Nánay na aŋ kahulugàn naŋ áhas na iyòn ay
aŋ pagpatúŋo sa pagyáman naŋ may árì naŋ
gamòt. Si Nánay ay nàpatawà
lámaŋ sa kanilà ŋ sábi, at hindí
sya nanìniwálà sa maŋa bágay na
iyòn.
|
When the Americans were already near the town of San
Miguel, it was reported to us that these people were not as hearsay
described them, so that our fear of them gradually gave way.
Accordingly we left our deep concealment and went to Paho. This too is
a place in the mountains, but nearer to the town. There we were met by
many fellow-townsmen and people from various other places. Most of them
were sick from staying in the mountains. Here the medicines which
Mother had taken up into the mountains instead of leaving them in the
town, were of great use. These medicines belonged to Father; he had
left them behind when he was banished to Sulu by the
Spanish priests. One morning someone called at our house to buy some
medicine. Mother went to the chest in which the medicine lay. When it
was opened, we saw a snake coiled up and sleeping on the rice-hulls
that covered the bottles. The people who saw this rejoiced greatly, but
Mother was only frightened. She did not know the meaning of the snake.
When the rejoicing was over, Mother asked why they were all so glad.
They answered that the meaning of the snake was that the owner of the
medicine was going to get rich. Mother only laughed at what they said,
for she did not believe in these things.
|
|
30Naŋ makaraàn
aŋ ilà ŋ bwàn ay iníwan námin
aŋ Páhoʾ at umwí kamì sa báyan.
Naŋ kamì ay dumatìŋ na doòn,
marámi sa ila ŋ
kasaŋkápan na naíwan námin ay
pinagnakàw naŋ ila ŋ táo ŋ naŋaíwan sa báyan.
Aŋ tablà na sahìg naŋ báhay naŋ
áli ni Nánay ay walá na, at hindí nila
nàláman kuŋ síno aŋ kumúha.
|
After a few months we left Paho and went home to our
town. When we got there, most of the few belongings we had left there
had been stolen by the few people who had been left in the town. The
boards of the flooring of the house of Mother’s aunt were gone,
and they did not know who had taken them.
|
|
35Hindí
nalaúnan aŋ ámi ŋ pagdatìŋ sa
báyan at nàbalíta ŋ aŋ maŋa
sundálo ŋ Amerikáno ay malápit na sa
báya-ŋ-San-Migèl. Kamì ay hindí nabagábag sa
balíta ŋ itò, at hinintày námin
aŋ kanila ŋ
pagdatìŋ. Isà ŋ kataŋhalían ay
matahímik aŋ báyan. Aŋ maŋa sundálu ŋ
naŋása báyan ay naŋagsialìs at aŋ
ibà ŋ 40hindí umalìs ay ipinagtapòn
aŋ kanila ŋ maŋa barìl. Aŋ dahilàn
naŋ bágay na iyòn ay aŋ pagpások
naŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ Amerikáno. Sa dulúhan naŋ bakúran
naŋ báhay na ámi ŋ kinàtirhàn
ay
nàkíta ko aŋ paglápit naŋ maŋa
sundálo. Aŋ salawàl nilà ay káki at aŋ kamiséta asùl.
Bitbìt nilà aŋ maŋa barìl at
nakahiléra sila naŋ pagtakbò sa bukirìn at
patúŋo silà sa daàn.
|
Not long after our arrival in town it was reported that
the American soldiers were now near to the town of San Miguel. We were
not made uneasy by this news, and awaited their arrival. One noon the
town was quiet. The soldiers who were in the town went away and those
who did not go away threw away their guns. The reason for this was the
entry of the American soldiers. From the back yard of the house in
which we were living I saw the approach of the soldiers. Their trousers
were khaki and their shirts blue. They carried their guns and ran in
single file across the fields and came toward the road.
|
|
Naŋ aŋ
maŋa Amerikáno y sya nà ŋ
namàmahálaʾ sa báyan, 5may ila ŋ bwà
ŋ aŋ maŋa útos ay mahihigpìt. Aŋ
maŋa ílaw ay
ipinapápatay sa alasès naŋ gabì, at wala
ŋ táo ŋ pinahìhintulúta ŋ maglakàd pagkaraàn naŋ
óras na itò. Sa maŋa bundòk na malápit
sa San-Migèl ay marámi ŋ maŋa sundálo
ŋ Tagálog at
madalàs nila ŋ sinalakáyan aŋ
báya-ŋ-San-Migèl. Dáhil sa 10maŋa
pagsalákay na itò, aŋ maŋa báhay sa
San-Migèl ay pinagsunòg naŋ maŋa
Amerikáno. Kuŋ gabi-gabì aŋ pagsalákay
naŋ maŋa sundálo,
gabi-gabì rìn namàn aŋ ginawà ŋ
panunúnog naŋ maŋa
báhay. Aŋ ámi ŋ maŋa
kápit-báhay ay nagsìsilípat sa ámin gabi-gabì
úpaŋ doòn makitúlog, sapagkàt sa
ámi ŋ báhay 15ay hindí
lubhà ŋ malakì aŋ paŋánib sa
maŋa bála naŋ nagsìsipaglabanàn. Aŋ
maŋgagamòt naŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ
Amerikáno na násàsa báya-ŋ-San-Migèl
ay nagìŋ kaybígan naŋ áki ŋ
tátay, at dáhil
díto y náligtas sa súnog aŋ ámi ŋ
tìráhan. Mínsan ay sinábi naŋ
maŋgagámot na itò kay Tátay na madalàs
sya ŋ sumáma sa 20maŋa patrúlya
at sinàsábi nya ríto na hwag sunúgin
aŋ ámi ŋ báhay. Sa kalaúnan, naŋ hindí
mapaalìs naŋ maŋa sundálo ŋ Tagálog aŋ maŋa
Amerikáno sa báyan, ay hinintuàn na nilà
aŋ pananalákay, at
aŋ báya y tumahímik nà.
|
When the Americans were in possession of the town,
orders for some months were strict. Lights were ordered extinguished at
six o’clock in the evening, and no one was allowed to walk about
after this hour. In the mountains near San Miguel were many Tagalog
soldiers, and they often attacked the town of San Miguel. On account of
these attacks the Americans set fire to houses in San Miguel. Night
after night when the soldiers attacked, the houses were regularly set
fire to. Our neighbors came to us every night to sleep with us, because
in our house the danger from the bullets of the contestants was not so
great. The doctor of the American soldiers who were in the town of San
Miguel had become a friend of my father’s, and for this reason
our house escaped being burned. Once this doctor told Father that he
often accompanied the patrols and told them not to burn down our house.
Finally, as the Tagalog soldiers did not succeed in driving the
Americans out of the town, they stopped their attacks, and the town
became quiet.
|